Post on 09-Feb-2020
1
Chapter Outline
Purchasing and Supply ManagementSupply Management TerminologySupply and Logistics
The Size of the Organization’s Spend and Financial Signifi cance
Supply ContributionThe Operational versus Strategic
Contribution of SupplyThe Direct and Indirect Contribution
of Supply
The Nature of the Organization
Supply Qualifi cations and Associations
Challenges AheadSupply Chain Management
MeasurementRisk ManagementSustainabilityGrowth and Infl uenceEffective Contribution to Organizational
Success
The Organization of This Text
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases1–1 Denniston Spices1–2 Erica Carson
Chapter One
Purchasing and Supply Management
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 1joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 1 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
2 Purchasing and Supply Management
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Rethink how supply can contribute more effectively to organizational goals and strategies?
• Try to fi nd out what the organization’s total spend with suppliers really is?
• Identify opportunities for meaningful involvement in major corporate activities?
How can we
• Align our supply strategy with the organization’s strategy?
• Get others to recognize the profi t-leverage effect of purchasing/supply management?
• Show how supply can affect our fi rm’s competitive position?
Every organization needs suppliers. No organization can exist without suppliers. There-
fore, the organization’s approach to suppliers, its acquisition processes and policies, and
its relationships with suppliers will impact not only the performance of the suppliers, but
also the organization’s own performance. No organization can be successful without the
support of its supplier base, operationally and strategically, short- and long-term.
Supply management is focused on the acquisition process recognizing the supply chain
and organizational contexts. Special emphasis is on decision making that aligns the sup-
plier network and the acquisition process with organizational goals and strategies and
ensures short- and long-term value for funds spent.
There is no one best way of organizing the supply function, conducting its activities, and
integrating suppliers effectively. This is both interesting and challenging. It is interesting
because the acquisition of organizational requirements covers a very wide and complex set
of approaches with different needs and different suppliers. It is challenging because of the
complexity and because the process is dynamic, not static. Moreover, some of the bright-
est minds in this world have been hired as marketing and sales experts to persuade supply
managers to choose their companies as suppliers. It is also challenging because every sup-
ply decision depends on a large variety of factors, the combination of which may well be
unique to a particular organization.
For more than 80 years, this text and its predecessors have presented the supply function
and suppliers as critical to an organization’s success, competitive advantage, and customer
satisfaction. Whereas in the 1930s this was a novel idea, over the past few decades there
has been growing interest at the executive level in the supply chain management and its
impact on strategic goals and objectives.
To increase long-term shareholder value, the company must increase revenue, decrease
costs, or both. Supply’s contribution should not be perceived as only focused on cost.
Supply can and should also be concerned with revenue enhancement. What can supply
and suppliers do to help the organization increase revenues or decrease costs? should be a
standard question for any supply manager.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 2joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 2 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 3
The supply function continues to evolve as technology and the worldwide competi-
tive environment require innovative approaches. The traditionally held view that multiple
sourcing increases supply security has been challenged by a trend toward single sourcing.
Results from closer supplier relations and cooperation with suppliers question the wisdom
of the traditional arm’s-length dealings between purchaser and supplier. Negotiation is re-
ceiving increasing emphasis as opposed to competitive bidding, and longer-term contracts
are replacing short-term buying techniques. E-commerce tools permit faster and lower-cost
solutions, not only on the transaction side of supply but also in management decision sup-
port. Organizations are continually evaluating the risks and opportunities of global sourc-
ing. All of these trends are a logical outcome of increased managerial concern with value
and increasing procurement aggressiveness in developing suppliers to meet specifi c supply
objectives of quality, quantity, delivery, price, service, and continuous improvement.
Effective purchasing and supply management contributes signifi cantly to organizational
success. This text explores the nature of this contribution and the management require-
ments for effective and effi cient performance. The acquisition of materials, services, and
equipment—of the right qualities, in the right quantities, at the right prices, at the right
time, with the right quality, and on a continuing basis—long has occupied the attention of
managers in both the public and private sectors.
Today, the emphasis is on the total supply management process in the context of organi-
zational goals and management of supply chains. The rapidly changing supply scene, with
cycles of abundance and shortages, varying prices, lead times, and availability, provides
a continuing challenge to those organizations wishing to obtain a maximum contribution
from this area. Furthermore, environmental, security, and fi nancial regulatory require-
ments have added considerable complexity to the task of ensuring that supply and suppliers
provide competitive advantage.
PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
Although some people may view interest in the performance of the supply function as a
recent phenomenon, it was recognized as an independent and important function by many
of the nation’s railroad organizations well before 1900.
Yet, traditionally, most fi rms regarded the supply function primarily as a clerical activ-
ity. However, during World War I and World War II, the success of a fi rm was not depen-
dent on what it could sell, since the market was almost unlimited. Instead, the ability to
obtain from suppliers the raw materials, supplies, and services needed to keep the factories
and mines operating was the key determinant of organizational success. Consequently, at-
tention was given to the organization, policies, and procedures of the supply function, and
it emerged as a recognized managerial activity.
During the 1950s and 1960s, supply management continued to gain stature as the num-
ber of people trained and competent to make sound supply decisions increased. Many
companies elevated the chief purchasing offi cer to top management status, with titles such
as vice president of purchasing, director of materials, or vice president of purchasing and
supply.
As the decade of the 1970s opened, organizations faced two vexing problems: an
international shortage of almost all the basic raw materials needed to support operations
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 3joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 3 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
4 Purchasing and Supply Management
and a rate of price increase far above the norm since the end of World War II. The
Middle East oil embargo during the summer of 1973 intensifi ed both the shortages and
the price escalation. These developments put the spotlight directly on supply, for their
performance in obtaining needed items from suppliers at realistic prices spelled the dif-
ference between success and failure. This emphasized again the crucial role played by
supply and suppliers.
As the decade of the 1990s unfolded, it became clear that organizations must have an
effi cient and effective supply function if they were to compete successfully in the global
marketplace. The early 21st century has brought new challenges in the areas of sustainabil-
ity, supply chain security, and risk management.
In large supply organizations, supply professionals often are divided into two categories:
the tacticians who handle day-to-day requirements and the strategic thinkers who possess
strong analytical and planning skills and are involved in activities such as strategic sourc-
ing. The extent to which the structure, processes, and people in a specifi c organization will
match these trends varies from organization to organization, and from industry to industry.
The future will see a gradual shift from predominantly defensive strategies, resulting from
the need to change in order to remain competitive, to aggressive strategies, in which fi rms take
an imaginative approach to achieving supply objectives to satisfy short-term and long-term or-
ganizational goals. The focus on strategy now includes an emphasis on process and knowledge
management. This text discusses what organizations should do today to remain competitive as
well as what strategic purchasing and supply management will focus on tomorrow.
Growing management interest through necessity and improved insight into the oppor-
tunities in the supply area has resulted in a variety of organizational concepts. Terms such
as purchasing, procurement, materiel, materials management, logistics, sourcing, supply management, and supply chain management are used almost interchangeably. No agree-
ment exists on the defi nition of each of these terms, and managers in public and private
institutions may have identical responsibilities but substantially different titles. The fol-
lowing defi nitions may be helpful in sorting out the more common understanding of the
various terms.
Supply Management TerminologySome academics and practitioners limit the term purchasing to the process of buying:
learning of the need, locating and selecting a supplier, negotiating price and other pertinent
terms, and following up to ensure delivery and payment. This is not the perspective taken
in this text. Purchasing, supply management, and procurement are used interchangeably
to refer to the integration of related functions to provide effective and effi cient materials
and services to the organization. Thus, purchasing or supply management is not only con-
cerned with the standard steps in the procurement process: (1) the recognition of need, (2)
the translation of that need into a commercially equivalent description, (3) the search for
potential suppliers, (4) the selection of a suitable source, (5) the agreement on order or con-
tract details, (6) the delivery of the products or services, and (7) the payment of suppliers.
Further responsibilities of supply may include receiving, inspection, warehousing, in-
ventory control, materials handling, packaging scheduling, in- and outbound transportation/
traffi c, and disposal. Supply also may have responsibility for other components of the
supply chain, such as the organization’s customers and their customers and their suppliers’
suppliers. This extension represents the term supply chain management, where the focus is
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 4joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 4 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 5
on minimizing costs and lead times across tiers in the supply chain to the benefi t of the fi nal
customer. The idea that competition may change from the fi rm level to the supply chain
level has been advanced as the next stage of competitive evolution.
In addition to the operational responsibilities that are part of the day-to-day activities
of the supply organization, there are strategic responsibilities. Strategic sourcing focuses
on long-term supplier relationships and commodity plans with the objectives of identifying
opportunities in areas such as cost reductions, new technology advancements, and supply
market trends. The Sabor case in Chapter 2 provides an excellent example of the need to
take a strategic perspective when planning long-term supply needs.
Lean purchasing or lean supply management refers primarily to a manufacturing con-
text and the implementation of just-in-time (JIT) tools and techniques to ensure every step
in the supply process adds value, that inventories are kept at a minimum level, and that
distances and delays between process steps are kept as short as possible. Instant communi-
cation of job status is essential and shared.
Supply and LogisticsThe large number of physical moves associated with any purchasing or supply chain activ-
ity has focused attention on the role of logistics. According to the Council of Supply Chain
Management Professionals, “Logistics management is that part of supply chain manage-
ment that plans, implements, and controls the effi cient, effective forward and reverse fl ow
and storage of goods, services, and related information between the point of origin and
the point of consumption in order to meet customers’ requirements.”1 This defi nition in-
cludes inbound, outbound, internal, and external movements. Logistics is not confi ned to
manufacturing organizations. It is relevant to service organizations and to both private- and
public-sector fi rms.
The attraction of the logistics concept is that it looks at the material fl ow process as
a complete system, from initial need for materials to delivery of fi nished product or ser-
vice to the customer. It attempts to provide the communication, coordination, and control
needed to avoid the potential confl icts between the physical distribution and the materials
management functions.
Supply infl uences a number of logistics-related activities, such as how much to buy
and inbound transportation. With an increased emphasis on controlling material fl ow, the
supply function must be concerned with decisions beyond supplier selection and price.
The Qmont Mining case in Chapter 4 illustrates the logistics considerations of supplying
multiple locations.
Organizations are examining business processes and exploring opportunities to inte-
grate boundary-spanning activities in order to reduce costs and improve lead times. For
example, Renault-Nissan announced in 2014 that it would integrate supply chain manage-
ment activities, including purchasing and logistics, with manufacturing and R&D. The
company had targeted €4.3 billion in annual savings from this initiative.2
1 Council of Supply Chain Management Professionals, http://cscmp.org/about-us/supply-chain- management-defi nitions, accessed February 15, 2014.2 M. Williams, “Renault-Nissan Could integrate SCM Functions,” Automotive Logistics, February 5, 2014, www.automotivelogisticsmagazine.com/news/renault-nissan-could-integrate-scm-functions, accessed February 15, 2014.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 5joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 5 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
6 Purchasing and Supply Management
Supply chain management is a systems approach to managing the entire fl ow of infor-
mation, materials, and services from raw materials suppliers through factories and ware-
houses to the end customer. The Institute for Supply Management (ISM) glossary defi nes
supply chain management as “the design and management of seamless, value-added pro-
cesses across organizational boundaries to meet the real needs of the end customer. The
development and integration of people and technological resources are critical to success-
ful supply chain integration.”3
The term value chain, a term commonly used in the strategy literature, has been used to
trace a product or service through its various moves and transformations, identifying the
costs added at each successive stage.
Some academics and practitioners believe the term chain does not properly convey what
really happens in a supply or value chain, and they prefer to use the term supply network or supply web.
The use of the concepts of purchasing, procurement, supply, and supply chain man-
agement will vary from organization to organization. It will depend on (1) their stage of
development and/or sophistication, (2) the industry in which they operate, and (3) their
competitive position.
The relative importance of the supply area compared to the other prime functions of the
organization will be a major determinant of the management attention it will receive. How
to assess the materials and services needs of a particular organization in context is one of
the purposes of this book. More than 45 cases are provided to provide insight into a variety
of situations and to give practice in resolving managerial problems.
THE SIZE OF THE ORGANIZATION’S SPEND AND FINANCIAL SIGNIFICANCE
The amount of money organizations spend with suppliers is staggering. Collectively, private
and public organizations in North America spend about 1.5 times the GDPs of the United
States, Canada, and Mexico combined, totaling at least $29 trillion U.S. dollars spent with
suppliers.
Dollars spent with suppliers as a percentage of total revenues is a good indicator of sup-
ply’s fi nancial impact. Obviously, the percentage of revenue that is paid out to suppliers
varies from industry to industry and organization to organization, and increased outsourc-
ing over the last decade has increased the percentage of spend signifi cantly. In almost
all manufacturing organizations, the supply area represents by far the largest single cat-
egory of spend, ranging from 50 to 80 percent of revenue. Wages, by comparison, typically
amount to about 10 to 20 percent. In comparison, the total dollars spent on outside suppliers
typically ranges from 25 to 35 percent of revenues. The Delphi Corporation case in Chapter 13
is a good illustration of the signifi cance of spend in a manufacturing organization. Total
purchases were $17 billion compared to revenues of $28 billion.
The fi nancial impact of the corporate spend is often illustrated by the profi t-leverage
effect and the return-on-assets effect.
3 Institute for Supply Management, “Glossary of Key Supply Management Terms,” www.ism.ws.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 6joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 6 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 7
Profi t-Leverage EffectThe profi t-leverage effect of supply savings is measured by the increase in profi t obtained
by a decrease in purchase spend. For example, for an organization with revenue of
$100 million, purchases of $60 million, and profi t of $8 million before tax, a 10 percent
reduction in purchase spend would result in an increase in profi t of 75 percent. To achieve
a $6,000,000 increase in profi t by increasing sales, assuming the same percentage hold,
might well require an increase of $75 million in sales, or 75 percent! Which of these two
options—an increase in sales of 75 percent or a decrease in purchase spend of 10 percent—
is more likely to be achieved?
This is not to suggest that it would be easy to reduce overall purchase costs by 10 per-
cent. In a fi rm that has given major attention to the supply function over the years, it would
be diffi cult, and perhaps impossible, to do. But, in a fi rm that has neglected supply, it would
be a realistic objective. Because of the profi t-leverage effect of supply, large savings are
possible relative to the effort that would be needed to increase sales by the much-larger
percentage necessary to generate the same effect on the profi t and loss (P&L) statement.
Since, in many fi rms, sales already has received much more attention, supply may be the
last untapped “profi t producer.”
Return-on-Assets EffectFinancial experts are increasingly interested in return on assets (ROA) as a measure of
corporate performance. Figure 1–1 shows the standard ROA model, using the same ratio
of fi gures as in the previous example, and assuming that inventory accounts for 30 percent
of total assets. If purchase costs were reduced by 10 percent, that would cause an extra ben-
efi t of a 10 percent reduction in the inventory asset base. The numbers in the boxes show
the initial fi gures used in arriving at the 10 percent ROA performance.
FIGURE 1–1Return-on-Assets Factors
††
Inventory$150,000
($135,000)
Sales$1 million
Minus
Total cost$950,000
($900,000)
*
†
Totalassets
$500,000
($485,000)
Profit$50,000
($100,000)
Sales$1 million
Sales$1 million
Divided by
Divided by
Investmentturnover 2
(2.06)
Profitmargin
5%
(10%)
ROA10%
(20.6%)
Multiplied by
*Inventory is approximately 30 percent of total assets.†Purchases account for half of total sales, or $500, 000.††Figures in parentheses assume a 10 percent reduction in purchase costs.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 7joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 7 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
8 Purchasing and Supply Management
The numbers below each box are the fi gures resulting from a 10 percent overall pur-
chase price reduction, and the end product is a new ROA of 20.6 percent or about an
100 percent increase in return on assets.
Reduction in Inventory InvestmentCharles Dehelly, senior executive vice president at Thomson Multimedia, headquartered in
Paris, France, said: “It came as quite a surprise to some supply people that I expected them
to worry about the balance sheet by insisting on measuring their return on capital employed
performance.”4 Mr. Dehelly was pushing for reductions in inventory investment, not only
by lowering purchase price, as shown in the example in Figure 1–1, but also by getting sup-
pliers to take over inventory responsibility and ownership, thereby removing asset dollars
in the ROA calculations, but also taking on the risk of obsolescence, inventory carrying,
and disposal costs. Since accountants value inventory items at the purchaser at purchased
cost, including transportation, but inventory at the supplier at manufacturing cost, the same
items stored at the supplier typically have a lower inventory investment and carrying cost.
Thus, it is a prime responsibility of supply to manage the supply process with the low-
est reasonable levels of inventory attainable. Inventory turnover and level are two major
measures of supply chain performance.
Evidently, the fi nancial impact of supply is on the balance sheet and the income state-
ment, the two key indicators of corporate fi nancial health used by managers, analysts,
fi nancial institutions, and investors. While the fi nancial impact of the supply spend is obvi-
ously signifi cant, it is by no means the only impact of supply on an organization’s ability
to compete and be successful.
SUPPLY CONTRIBUTION
Although supply’s fi nancial impact is major, supply contributes to organizational goals and
strategies in a variety of other ways. The three major perspectives on supply are shown in
Figure 1–2:
1. Operational versus strategic.
2. Direct and indirect.
3. Negative, neutral, and positive.
The Operational versus Strategic Contribution of SupplyFirst, supply can be viewed in two contexts: operational, which is characterized as trouble avoidance, and strategic, which is characterized as opportunistic.
The operational context is the most familiar. Many people inside the organization are
inconvenienced to varying degrees when supply does not meet minimum expectations.
Improper quality, wrong quantities, and late delivery may make life miserable for the ul-
timate user of the product or service. This is so basic and apparent that “no complaints” is
assumed to be an indicator of good supply performance. The diffi culty is that many users
never expect anything more and hence may not receive anything more.
4 M. R. Leenders and P. F. Johnson, Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities (Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, March 2002), p. 104.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 8joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 8 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 9
The operational side of supply concerns itself with the transactional, day-to-day opera-
tions traditionally associated with purchasing. The operational side can be streamlined and
organized in ways designed to routinize and automate many of the transactions, thus free-
ing up time for the supply manager to focus on the strategic contribution.
The strategic side of supply is future oriented and searches for opportunities to provide
competitive advantage. Whereas on the operational side the focus is on executing current
tasks as designed, the strategic side focuses on new and better solutions to organizational
and supply challenges. (Chapter 2 discusses the strategic side in detail.)
The Direct and Indirect Contribution of SupplyThe second perspective is that of supply’s potential direct or indirect contribution to orga-
nizational objectives.
Supply savings, the profi t-leverage effect, and the return-on-assets effect demonstrate
the direct contribution supply can make to the company’s fi nancial statements. Although
the argument that supply savings fl ow directly to the bottom line appears self-evident, ex-
perience shows that savings do not always get that far. Budget heads, when presented with
savings, may choose to spend this unexpected windfall on other requirements.
To combat this phenomenon, some supply organizations have hired fi nancial controllers
to assure that supply savings do reach the bottom line. Such was the case at Praxair, a global
supplier of specialty gases and technologies. The chief supply offi cer and the CFO agreed
that a fi nancial controller position was needed in the supply organization to support fi nancial
analysis and budgeting. Validating cost savings and linking cost savings to the business unit
operating budgets were an important part of this person’s responsibilities.5
FIGURE 1–2Purchasing’s Operational and Strategic Contributions
Source: Michiel R.
Leenders and Anna
E. Flynn, Value-Driven Purchasing: Managing the Key Steps in the Acquisition Process (Burr Ridge, IL:
Richard D. Irwin,
1995), p. 7.
2. Supply contribution
Indirect
Enhancing performance of others
Direct
Bottom-line impact
1. Supply contribution
Strategic
Opportunity maximization
Operational
Trouble prevention
3. Supply contribution
Neutral
Operationally acceptableStrategically deficient
Directly acceptableIndirectly deficient
Positive
Operationally acceptableStrategically acceptable
Directly acceptableIndirectly acceptable
Negative
Operationally deficientStrategically deficient
Directly deficientIndirectly deficient
5 Leenders and Johnson, Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities, p. 89.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 9joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 9 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
10 Purchasing and Supply Management
The appeal of the direct contribution of supply is that both inventory reduction and pur-
chasing savings are measurable and tangible evidence of supply contribution.
The supply function also contributes indirectly by enhancing the performance of
other departments or individuals in the organization. This perspective puts supply on
the management team of the organization. Just as in sports, the team’s objective is to
win. Who scores is less important than the total team’s performance. For example, bet-
ter quality may reduce rework, lower warranty costs, increase customer satisfaction,
and /or increase the ability to sell more or at a higher price. Ideas from suppliers may
result in improved design, lower manufacturing costs, and/or a faster idea-to-design-to-
product-completion-to-customer-delivery cycle. Each would improve the organization’s
competitiveness.
Indirect contributions come from supply’s role as an information source; its effect on
effi ciency, competitive position, risk, and company image; the management training pro-
vided by assignments in the supply area; and its role in developing management strategy
and social policy. The benefi ts of the indirect contribution may outweigh the direct con-
tribution, but measuring the indirect benefi ts is diffi cult since it involves many “soft” or
intangible contributions that are diffi cult to quantify.
Information SourceThe contacts of the supply function in the marketplace provide a useful source of information
for various functions within the organization. Primary examples include information about
prices, availability of goods, new sources of supply, new products, and new technology, all
of interest to many other parts of the organization. New marketing techniques and distribu-
tion systems used by suppliers may be of interest to the marketing group. News about major
investments, mergers, acquisition candidates, international political and economic develop-
ments, pending bankruptcies, major promotions and appointments, and current and potential
customers may be relevant to marketing, fi nance, research, and top management. Supply’s
unique position vis-à-vis the marketplace should provide a comprehensive listening post.
Effect on Effi ciencyThe effi ciency with which supply processes are performed will show up in other operating
results. While the fi rm’s accounting system may not be sophisticated enough to identify
poor effi ciency as having been caused by poor purchase decisions, that could be the case.
If supply selects a supplier who fails to deliver raw materials or parts that measure up to
the agreed-on quality standards, this may result in a higher scrap rate or costly rework,
requiring excessive direct labor expenditures. If the supplier does not meet the agreed-on
delivery schedule, this may require a costly rescheduling of production, decreasing overall
production effi ciency, or, in the worst case, a shutdown of the production line—and fi xed
costs continue even though there is no output. Many supply managers refer to user depart-
ments as internal customers or clients and focus on improving the effi ciency and effective-
ness of the function with a goal of providing outstanding internal customer service.
Effect on Competitive Position/Customer SatisfactionA fi rm cannot be competitive unless it can deliver end products or services to its custom-
ers when they are wanted, of the quality desired, and at a price the customer feels is fair.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 10joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 10 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 11
If supply doesn’t do its job, the fi rm will not have the required materials or services when
needed, of desired quality, and at a price that will keep end-product costs competitive and
under control.
The ability of the supply organization to secure requirements of better quality, faster, at
a better price than competitors, will not only improve the organization’s competitive posi-
tion, but also improve customer satisfaction. The same can be said for greater fl exibility
to adjust to customers’ changing needs. Thus, a demonstrably better-performing supply
organization is a major asset on any corporate team.
A major chemical producer was able to develop a signifi cantly lower-cost option for a
key raw material that proved to be environmentally superior as well as better quality. By
selling its better end product at somewhat lower prices, the chemical producer was able to
double its market share, signifi cantly improving its fi nancial health and competitive posi-
tion as well as the satisfaction of its customers.
Effect on Organizational RiskRisk management is becoming an ever-increasing concern. The supply function clearly
impacts the organization in terms of operational, fi nancial, and reputation risk. Supply
disruptions in terms of energy, service, or direct or indirect requirements can impact the
ability of the organization to operate as planned and as expected by its customers, creating
operational risks.
Given that commodity and fi nancial markets establish prices that may go up or down
beyond the control of the individual purchaser, and that long-term supply agreements re-
quire price provisions, the supply area may represent a signifi cant level of fi nancial risk.
Furthermore, unethical or questionable supply practices and suppliers may expose the or-
ganization to signifi cant reputation risk.
Effect on ImageThe actions of supply personnel infl uence directly the public relations and image of a com-
pany. If actual and potential suppliers are not treated in a businesslike manner, they will
form a poor opinion of the entire organization and will communicate this to other fi rms.
This poor image will adversely affect the purchaser’s ability to get new business and to
fi nd new and better suppliers. Public confi dence can be boosted by evidence of sound and
ethical policies and fair implementation of them.
The large spend of any organization draws attention in terms of supplier chosen, the
process used to choose suppliers, the ethics surrounding the supply process, and confor-
mance to regulatory requirements. Are the suppliers chosen “clean” in terms of child labor,
environmental behavior, and reputation? Is the acquisition process transparent and legally,
ethically, strategically, and operationally defensible as sound practice? Do supply’s actions
take fully into account environmental, fi nancial, and other regulatory requirements, such
as national security?
Global brands have come under increased scrutiny for their sourcing policies, accused
of turning a blind eye to the labor practices of their suppliers. The collapse of a Bangladeshi
factory in April 2013, killing more than 1,100 people, focused worldwide attention on
poor working conditions and low pay for workers manufacturing garments for companies
that included Walmart, Benetton, and Loblaws. The disaster spurred a debate about the
responsibility of large retailers to ensure that their supplier factories met acceptable safety
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 11joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 11 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
12 Purchasing and Supply Management
standards and paid their workers a living wage. There are an estimated 5,000 garment fac-
tories in Bangladesh, employing approximately 3.6 million workers, many of whom are
paid the minimum wage of $38 a month.
Maintaining a proper corporate image is the responsibility of every team member and
supply is no exception.
Training GroundThe supply area also is an excellent training ground for new managers. The needs of
the organization may be quickly grasped. Exposure to the pressure of decision making
under uncertainty with potentially serious consequences allows for evaluation of the
individual’s ability and willingness to make sound decisions and assume responsibil-
ity. Contacts with many people at various levels and a variety of functions may assist
the individual in learning about how the organization works. Many organizations fi nd
it useful to include the supply area as part of a formal job rotation system for high-
potential employees.
Examples of senior corporate executives with signifi cant supply experience include
Mary Barra, CEO of General Motors; Willie A. Deese, executive vice president, Merck &
Co.; and Richard B. Jacobs, president of Eaton Corporation’s Filtration Division.
Management Strategy Supply also can be used as a tool of management strategy and social policy. Does manage-
ment wish to introduce and stimulate competition? Does it favor geographical representa-
tion, minority interest, and environmental and social concerns? For example, are domestic
sources preferred? Will resources be spent on assisting minority suppliers? As part of
an overall organization strategy, the supply function can contribute a great deal. Assur-
ance of supply of vital materials or services in a time of general shortages can be a major
competitive advantage. Similarly, access to a better-quality or a lower-priced product or
service may represent a substantial gain. These strategic positions in the marketplace may
be gained through active exploration of international and domestic markets, technology,
innovative management systems, and the imaginative use of corporate resources. Vertical
integration and its companion decisions of make or buy (insource or outsource) are ever-
present considerations in the management of supply.
The potential contribution of supply to strategy is obvious. Achievement depends on
both top executive awareness of this potential and the ability to marshal corporate re-
sources to this end. At the same time, it is the responsibility of those charged with the
management of the supply function to seek strategic opportunities in the environment and
to draw top executive attention to them. This requires a thorough familiarity with organiza-
tional objectives, strategy, and long-term plans and the ability to infl uence these in the light
of new information. Chapter 2 discusses both potential supply contributions to business
strategy and the major strategy areas within the supply function.
Progressive managers have recognized the potential contributions of the supply manage-
ment area and have taken the necessary steps to ensure results. One important step in suc-
cessful organizations has been the elevation to top executive status of the supply manager.
Although titles are not always consistent with status and value in an organization, they still
make a statement within and outside of most organizations. Currently, the most common title
of the chief supply offi cer is vice president, followed by director and manager.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 12joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 12 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 13
The elevation of the chief supply offi cer to executive status, coupled with high-caliber
staff and the appropriate authority and responsibility, has resulted in an exciting and fruit-
ful realization of the potential of the supply function in many companies. Chapter 3 dis-
cusses supply organizations issues in greater detail.
THE NATURE OF THE ORGANIZATION
The nature of the organization will determine how it will structure and manage its supply
function. Whether the organization is public or private and produces goods or services or
both, its mission, vision, and strategies, its size, number of sites, location, fi nancial strength,
and reputation will all be factors infl uencing its supply options and decisions. These will be
addressed broadly in this fi rst chapter and will be added to subsequently in this text.
Public or Private OrganizationPublic institutions, including all levels of government from municipal to state or provin-
cial to federal, tend to be service providers but are not exclusively so and are subject to
strict regulatory requirements regarding acquisition processes and policies. The public
sector in many countries also includes education, health, utilities, and a host of agencies,
boards, institutes, and so forth. The Wentworth Hospital case in Chapter 7 provides an
example of supply in a public-sector context. This case illustrates how many purchases
in the public sector can be for capital and indirect supplies, which creates challenges for
supply to infl uence purchasing decisions that ensure best value.
A large segment of the acquisition needs of public institutions is concerned with the
support of the organization’s mission and maintenance of facilities and offi ces. Concerns
over public spending deal with transparency and fairness of access to all eligible suppliers,
social aims such as support of minority and disadvantaged groups, and national security.
Need defi nition and specifi cation are often part of the supply manager’s responsibilities
and are often geared to allow for multiple bidders.
That not all public organizations are alike is evident from Figure 1–3, which shows just
some of the differences among public bodies.
Nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and other nonprofi t organizations would
have a breakdown similar to those listed for public organizations, but might also operate
internationally.
Private OrganizationsPrivate organizations, which include companies with publicly traded stocks, tend to have
fewer constraints on need defi nition, specifi cation, and supplier selection. The laws of the
FIGURE 1–3Differentiationsfor SupplyManagementin PublicOrganizations
Municipal State or Provincial Federal
Economic
Substantial
Large
Many
Other or Combination
Combination
Medium
Few
Social Aims
Limited
Small
SingleNumber of Sites:
Size:
Revenue Generation:
Mission:
Level:
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 13joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 13 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
14 Purchasing and Supply Management
land (covered in Chapter 5) will establish the main ground rules for commerce. Transpar-
ency of commitments with suppliers has recently become more relevant to ensure that long-
term commitments are properly disclosed in the company’s fi nancial statements. Whereas
in public institutions standardization is seen as a means of fairness to suppliers, in private
companies, custom specifi cations are seen as a means of securing competitive advantage.
Figure 1–4 shows some of the infl uencers that will affect supply management in private
organizations. It is clear that for both public and private organizations these differences
will affect supply signifi cantly and some generalizations on supply impact follow.
Goods or Service ProducersAnother major supply infl uence is whether the organization produces goods or services or
both. Goods producers, often called manufacturers, may produce a wide range of products,
both in the industrial goods category and in consumer goods. For goods producers, normally
the largest percentage of total spend of the organization is on materials, purchased parts,
packaging, and transportation for the goods produced. For service providers (and the range
of possible services is huge), normally the largest percent of spend is focused on services
and the process enabling the delivery of the services. The Erica Carson case in this chapter
describes a supply decision in a large services organization, a fi nancial institution. This case
illustrates the opportunities for supply to contribute to the customer value proposition.
The following table identifi es what the impact on organizational requirements is likely
to be depending on whether the organization is primarily focused on manufacturing or
providing a service:
Manufacturer Service Provider
• The largest portion of needs is gener-ated by customer needs.
• The largest portion of spend with sup-pliers will be on direct requirements which comprise products sold to customers.
• The largest portion of needs is gener-ated by capital, services, and other requirements enabling employees to provide the service.
• In retailing the largest spend is focused on resale requirements.
Very few organizations are pure manufacturers or service providers. Most represent a mix-
ture of both. A restaurant provides meals and drinks as well as service and a place to eat.
FIGURE 1–4 Differentiations for Supply Management in Private Organizations
Manufacturer Combination Services
Differentiation
Large
Many
Many International
Combination
Medium
Few
Few International
Low cost
Small
Single
Domestic Location:
Strong MediumWeak Financial Strength:
OutstandingMediumPoor Reputation:
Number of Sites:
Size:
Strategy:
Goods or Services:
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 14joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 14 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 15
An insurance company provides insurance policies and claim service as well as peace of
mind. An R&D organization performs research, as well as research reports, models, and
prototypes. A manufacturer may supply capital goods as well as repair service and avail-
ability of replacement parts.
Wholesalers, distributors, and retailers provide resale products in smaller quantities and
in more convenient locations at more convenient times than the manufacturers can provide.
For these resellers the ability to buy well is critical for success.
Resource and mining organizations explore for natural resources and fi nd ways and
means of bringing these to commodity markets. Educational institutions attempt to trans-
form students into educated persons, frequently providing them with meals, residences,
classrooms, parking facilities, and, hopefully, diplomas or degrees. Health organizations
provide diagnostic and repair services using a very large variety of professionals, equip-
ment, facilities, medicines, and parts to keep their clients healthy and functioning.
It is no surprise that the nature of the organization in terms of the goods and services it
provides will signifi cantly affect the requirements of its supply chain.
The Mission, Vision, and Strategy of the OrganizationSupply strategy has to be congruent with organizational strategy. Therefore, the mission,
vision, and strategy of the organization are the key drivers for how the supply function will
be managed and how supply decisions are made and executed. A nonprofi t organization
with social aims may acquire its offi ce needs totally differently from one that competes on
cost in a tough commercial or consumer marketplace. An innovation-focused organization
may defi ne fl exibility quite differently from one that depends largely on the acquisition and
transformation or distribution of commodities.
In the past, the supply manager was largely focused on the traditional value determi-
nants of quality, quantity, delivery, price, and service as the fi ve key drivers of sound
supply decisions. Today’s supply managers face a host of additional concerns, as cor-
porate mission, vision, and strategies require concerns over risk, the environment, social
responsibility, transparency, regulation, and innovation as well. Thus, the old adage of
value for money, a guiding principle for supply managers for centuries, has become a lot
tougher over the last few decades and continues to evolve. The text and cases in this book
are focused on major supply decisions appropriate for the unique organization in which the
supply professional is employed.
The Size of the OrganizationThe larger the organization, the greater the absolute amount of spend with suppliers. And
the amount of the spend will be a major determinant of how many resources can be allocated
to the acquisition process. Given a cost of acquisition of 1 to 2 percent of what is acquired,
for a $100,000 purchase, up to $2,000 can be spent on acquisition. However, a $100 million
acquisition can afford up to $2 million and a $1 billion spend up to $20 million.
Therefore, the larger the amount of spend, the greater the time and care that can and
should be allocated to acquisition. Therefore, in very small organizations, the responsibility
for acquisition may be a part-time allocation to one or more individuals who probably wear
multiple hats. In very large organizations, supply professionals may be completely dedi-
cated to one category of requirements on a full-time basis. And a supply group may count
hundreds of professionals.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 15joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 15 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
16 Purchasing and Supply Management
Single or Multiple SitesAn additional infl uence is whether the organization operates out of a single or multiple
sites. The simplest situation is the single site. The supply situation becomes more complex
as the number of sites increases. Transportation and storage issues multiply with multiple
sites along with communication and control challenges. This is especially true for multina-
tionals supplying multiple sites in different countries.
Financial StrengthSupply management stripped to its bare essentials deals with the exchange of money for
goods and services. With the acquiring company responsible for the money and the sup-
plier for the goods and services, the ability of the buying organization to pay will be a very
important issue in the supplier’s eyes. And the ability to pay and fl exibility on when to pay
depend on the fi nancial strength of the organization. The stronger the buying organization
is fi nancially, the more attractive it becomes as a potential customer. A supplier will be
more anxious to offer an exceptionally good value proposition to an attractive customer.
And the ability and willingness to pay quickly after receipt of goods or services add valu-
able bargaining chips to any purchaser.
ReputationCorporate reputation in the trade is another important factor in building a positive corpo-
rate image both for suppliers and purchasers. If supply management is defi ned as the fi ght
for superior suppliers, then a strong corporate image and reputation are valuable contribu-
tors. Superior suppliers can pick and choose their customers. Superior suppliers prefer to
deal with superior customers. Superior customers enhance a superior supplier’s reputation.
“You are known by the company you keep” applies in the corporate world just like it does
in personal life. And supply managers can signifi cantly affect their company’s image by
their actions and relations with suppliers.
For a long time the reputation of Fisher & Paykel (F&P) in New Zealand and Australia
was such that any F&P supplier could use this as a persuasive argument for gaining
additional customers in that area of the world. “If you are good enough to supply F&P, you
are good enough for us” was the implication. A good buyer–supplier relationship is built
on the rock of impeccable performance to contract agreements. Pay the right amount on
time without hassle and deliver the right quality and quantity of goods or services on time
and charge the correct price without hassle. These commitments are not as simple as they
sound. Moreover, superior customers and superior suppliers add ethical treatment; advance
communications on future developments in technology, markets, and opportunities for im-
provements as additional expectations; and are continually striving to do better.
Corporate reputations are built on actions and results, not on noble intentions. It takes
time to build a superior reputation, but not much time to harm a reputation.
SUPPLY QUALIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATIONS
In recognition that the talent in supply has to match the challenges of the profession, public
and private organizations as well as supply associations have taken the initiative to ensure
well-qualifi ed supply professionals are available to staff the function.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 16joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 16 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 17
EducationAlthough there are no universal educational requirements for entry-level supply jobs, most
large organizations require a college degree in business administration or management.
Several major educational institutions, such as Arizona State University, Bowling Green
State University, George Washington University, Miami University, Michigan State Uni-
versity, and Western Michigan University, now offer an undergraduate degree major in
Purchasing/Supply/Supply Chain/Logistics Management as part of the bachelor in busi-
ness administration degree. In addition, many schools offer certifi cate programs or some
courses in supply, for either full- or part-time students. A number of schools, including
Arizona State, Michigan State, NYU Stern, and Howard University, also offer a specialization
in supply chain management as part of a master of business administration degree program.
In Canada, the Ivey Business School has offered for over 60 years a purchasing and
supply course as part of its undergraduate and graduate degree offerings. Other universities
such as HEC, Laval, York, Queens, University of British Columbia, and Victoria have fol-
lowed suit; academic interest in supply chain management is at an all-time high.
While, obviously, a university degree is not a guarantee of individual performance and
success, the supply professional with one or more degrees is perceived on an educational
par with professionals in other disciplines such as engineering, accounting, marketing, in-
formation technology (IT), human resources (HR), or fi nance. That perception is important
in the role that supply professionals are invited to play on the organizational team.
Professional AssociationsAs any profession matures, its professional associations emerge as focal points for efforts
to advance professional practice and conduct. In the United States, the major professional
association is the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), founded in 1915 as the National
Association of Purchasing Agents. The ISM is an educational and research association
with over 40,000 members who belong to ISM through its network of domestic and inter-
national affi liated associations.
In addition to regional and national conferences, ISM sponsors seminars for supply
people. It publishes a variety of books and monographs and the leading scholarly journal in
the fi eld, The Journal of Supply Chain Management, which it began in 1965. Additionally,
ISM and its Canadian counterpart, the Supply Chain Management Association (SCMA),
formally the Purchasing Management Association of Canada, work with colleges and uni-
versities to encourage and support the teaching of purchasing and supply management and
related subjects and provide fi nancial grants to support doctoral student research.
ISM launched the Certifi ed Professional in Supply Management (CPSM) program in
May 2008. The CPSM program focuses skill development in areas such as supplier re-
lationship management, commodity management, risk and compliance issues, and social
responsibility.
Since the early 1930s, ISM has conducted the monthly “ISM Report on Business,” which
is one of the best-recognized current barometers of business activity in the manufacturing
sector. In 1998, the association initiated the Nonmanufacturing ISM Report on Business.
The survey results are normally released on the second business day of each month. The
Ivey Purchasing Managers Index (Ivey PMI), conducted by the Ivey Business School, is
the Canadian equivalent of ISM’s Report on Business, but covers the complete Canadian
economy, including the manufacturing services and government sectors.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 17joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 17 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
18 Purchasing and Supply Management
In 1986, CAPS Research (formally the Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies) was
established as a national affi liation agreement between ISM and the College of Business at
Arizona State University. CAPS is dedicated to the discovery and dissemination of strate-
gic supply management knowledge and best practices. It conducts benchmarking studies,
runs executive round tables and best practices workshops, and publishes research reports
in a wide range of areas.
In Canada, the professional association is the Supply Chain Management Association
(SCMA), formally the PMAC, formed in 1919. Its membership of approximately 8,000
is organized in 10 provincial and territorial institutes from coast to coast. Its primary
objective is education, and in addition to sponsoring a national conference, it offers an
accreditation program leading to the Supply Chain Management Professional (SCMP)
designation.
In addition to ISM and SCMA, there are other professional purchasing associa-
tions, such as the National Institute of Governmental Purchasing (NIGP), the National
Association of State Purchasing Offi cials (NASPO), the National Association of
Educational Procurement (NAEP), and the Association for Healthcare Resource and
Materials Management (AHPMM).
Several of these associations offer their own certifi cation p rograms. Most i ndustrialized
countries have their own professional purchasing associations. CIPS (Chartered Institute of
Purchasing and Supply) has affi liates in the United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand,
Africa, mainland China, and Hong Kong SAR. Other examples include the Indian Institute
of Materials Management and the Japan Materials Management Association. These
national associations are loosely organized into the International Federation of Purchasing
and Supply Management (IFPSM), which has as its objective the fostering of cooperation,
education, and research in purchasing on a worldwide basis among the 48 national and
regional purchasing associations worldwide, representing approximately 250,000 supply
professionals.
CHALLENGES AHEAD
There are at least six major challenges facing the supply profession over the next decade:
supply chain management, measurement, risk management, sustainability, growth and in-
fl uence, and effective contribution to corporate success.
Supply Chain ManagementThe success of fi rms like Walmart and Zara in exploiting supply chain opportunities has
helped popularize the whole fi eld of supply chain management. Nevertheless, signifi cant
challenges remain: While the giant fi rms in automotive, electronics, and retailing can force
the various members of the supply chain to do their bidding, smaller companies do not
have that luxury. Thus, each organization has to determine for itself how far it can extend
its sphere of infl uence within the supply chain and how to respond to supply chain initia-
tives by others. Clearly, opportunities to reduce inventories, shorten lead times and dis-
tances, plan operations better, remove uncertainties, and squeeze waste out of the supply
chain are still abundant. Thus, the search for extra value in the supply chain will continue
for a considerable period of time.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 18joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 18 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 19
MeasurementThere is signifi cant interest in better measurement of supply not only to provide senior
management with better information regarding supply’s contribution, but also to be able to
assess the benefi ts of various supply experiments. No one set of measurements is likely to
suffi ce for all supply organizations. Therefore, fi nding the set of measures most appropriate
for a particular organization’s circumstances is part of the measurement challenge.
Risk ManagementA study at Michigan State University found that supply chain disruptions and supply chain
risk are among the most critical issues facing supply chain managers.6 Supply chains have
become increasingly global and, therefore, face risks of supply interruptions, fi nancial and
exchange rate fl uctuations, lead time variability, and security and protection of intellectual
property rights, to name only a few. The trend to single sourcing and lean global supply
chains has also created the increased risks for supply disruptions.
Supply managers need to continually assess risks in the supply chain and balance risk/
reward opportunities when making supply decisions. For example, the attraction of lower
prices from an offshore supplier may create longer-term high costs as a result of the need to
carry additional safety stock inventories or lost sales from stock-outs. The Russel Wisselink
case in Chapter 9 describes how one organization ran into problems in a low cost country
sourcing program. Risk management will be covered in more detail in Chapter 2.
SustainabilityResponsibility for reverse logistics and disposal has traditionally fallen under the supply
organization umbrella (see Chapters 16 and 17). These activities include the effective and
effi cient capture and disposition of downstream products from customers. More recently,
however, pressures from government and consumer groups are motivating organizations
to reduce the impact of their supply chains on the natural environment. For example, the
European Union (EU) has set aggressive targets for greenhouse gas reductions and cuts
to overall energy consumption, and has implemented new legislation as a result. Supply
will be at the forefront of sustainability initiatives. Senior management will expect sup-
ply to work with suppliers to identify solutions for the environmental and sustainability
challenges they face.
Growth and Infl uenceGrowth and infl uence in terms of the role of supply and its responsibilities inside an orga-
nization can be represented in four areas as identifi ed in a CAPS Research focus study.7
In the fi rst place, supply can grow in the percentage of the organization’s total spend for
which it is meaningfully involved. Thus, categories of spend traditionally not involving
purchasing, such as real estate, insurance, energy, benefi t programs, part-time help, relo-
cation services, consulting, marketing spend with advertising and media agencies, travel
and facilities management, IT, and telecommunications and logistics, have become part of
procurement’s responsibility in more progressive corporations.
6 S. A. Melnyk et al., Supply Chain Management 2010 and Beyond: Mapping the Future of the Strategic Supply Chain (The Eli Broad College of Business at Michigan State University, 2006).7 Leenders and Johnson, Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 19joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 19 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
20 Purchasing and Supply Management
Second, the growth of supply responsibilities can be seen in the span of supply chain
activities under purchasing or supply leadership. Recent additions include accounts pay-
able, legal, training and recruiting, programs and customer bid support, and involvement
with new business development.
Third, growth can occur in the type of involvement of supply in what is acquired and
supply chain responsibilities. Clearly, on the lowest level, there is no supply involvement
at all. The next step up is a transactionary or documentary role. Next, professional in-
volvement implies that supply personnel have the opportunity to exercise their expertise in
important acquisition process stages. At the highest level, meaningful involvement, a term
fi rst coined by Dr. Ian Stuart, represents true team member status for supply at the execu-
tive table. Thus, in any major decision taken in the organization, the question What are the supply implications of this decision? is as natural and standard as What are the fi nancial implications of this decision?
Fourth, supply can grow by its involvement in corporate activities from which it might
have been previously excluded. While involvement in make-or-buy decisions, economic
forecasts, countertrade, in- and outsourcing, and supplier conferences might be expected,
other activities such as strategic planning, mergers and acquisitions, visionary task
forces, and initial project planning might be good examples of broader corporate strategic
integration.
Each of these four areas of opportunity for growth allows for supply to spread its wings
and increase the value of its contributions.
Effective Contribution to Organizational SuccessUltimately, supply’s measure of its contribution needs to be seen in the success of the or-
ganization as a whole. Contributing operationally and strategically, directly and indirectly,
and in a positive mode, the challenge for supply is to be an effective team member. Mean-
ingful involvement of supply can be demonstrated by the recognition accorded supply by
all members of the organization.
How happy are other corporate team members to have supply on their team? Do they
see supply’s role as critical to the team’s success? Thus, to gain not only senior manage-
ment recognition but also the proper appreciation of peer managers in other functions is a
continuing challenge for both supply professionals and academics.
THE ORGANIZATION OF THIS TEXT
In this fi rst chapter are listed the more common infl uences for all organizations. In subse-
quent chapters, we will cover various decisions regarding organizational and supply strat-
egies, organization supply processes, make or buy, the variety of organizational needs,
and how to translate these into commercial equivalents. These will be followed by deci-
sions on quality, quantity, delivery, price, and service—the traditional fi ve value criteria—
culminating in supplier selection. Suppliers are located domestically and internationally
and their location will affect how supply should be managed. The legal and ethical frame-
work for supply establishes the framework for the contract between these two parties. How
to evaluate supplier performance and how to relate to suppliers is followed by a section
on supply chain associated responsibilities which may or may not be part of the supply
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 20joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 20 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 21
manager’s assignment. This text concludes with the evaluation of the supply function, its
performance reporting, and current trends in the fi eld.
Conclusion If the chief executive officer and all members of the management team can say, “Because
of the kinds of suppliers we have and the way we relate to them, we can outperform our
competition and provide greater customer satisfaction,” then the supply function is con-
tributing to its full potential.
This is the ambitious goal of this text: to provide insights for those who wish to under-
stand the supply function better, whether or not they are or will be employed in supply
directly.
1. What is the profit-leverage effect of supply? Is it the same in all organizations?
2. “Supply is not profit making; instead, it is profit taking since it spends organizational
resources.” Do you agree?
3. What kinds of decisions does a typical supply manager make?
4. “In the long term, the success of any organization depends on its ability to create and
maintain a customer.” Do you agree? What does this have to do with purchasing and
supply management?
5. Is purchasing a profession? If not, why not? If yes, how will the profession, and the
people practicing it, change over the next decade?
6. Differentiate between purchasing, procurement, materials management, logistics,
supply management, and supply chain management.
7. In what ways might e-commerce influence the role of supply managers in their own
organizations? In managing supply chains or networks?
8. In the petroleum and coal products industry, the total purchase/sales ratio is 80 per-
cent, while in the food industry it is about 60 percent. Explain what these numbers
mean. Of what significance is this number for a supply manager in a company in each
of these industries?
9. How does supply management affect return on assets (ROA)? In what specific ways
could you improve ROA through supply management?
10. How can the expectations of supply differ for private versus public organizations?
Services versus goods producers?
Carter C. R.; L. M. Ellram, L. Kaufmann; C. W. Autry; X. Zhao; and T. E. Callarman,
“Looking Back and Moving Forward: 50 years of the Journal of Supply Chain Management,”Journal of Supply Chain Management 50, no. 1, 2014, pp. 1–7.
Cavinato, J. L.; A. E. Flynn; and R. G. Kauffman. The Supply Management Handbook.
7th ed. Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2007.
Johnson, P. F., and M. R. Leenders, Supply’s Organizational Roles and Responsibilities, Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, May 2012, 118 pages.
Questions forReviewand Discussion
References
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 21joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 21 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
22 Purchasing and Supply Management
Lambert, D. M. Supply Chain Management: Processes, Partnerships and Performance, Sarasota, Florida: Supply Chain Management Institute, 2004.
Leenders, M. R., and H. E. Fearon. “Developing Purchasing’s Foundation,” The Journal of Supply Chain Management 44, no. 2 (2008), pp. 17–27.
Leenders, M. R., and A. E. Flynn. Value-Driven Purchasing: Managing the Key Steps in the Acquisition Process. Burr Ridge, IL: Irwin Professional Publishing, 1995.
Villena, V. H., E. Revilla, and T. Choi, “The Dark Side of Buyer-Supplier Relationships:
A Social Capital Perspective,” Journal of Operations Management 29, no. 6 (2011),
pp. 561–576.
Case 1–1
Denniston Spices
Amy Lin, materials planner at Denniston Spices, in
Phoenix, Arizona, was faced with an important problem
caused by a supplier who was implementing a new en-
terprise resource planning (ERP) system. It was Tuesday,
April 9, 2014, and during a call the previous day from
Juan Aranda, sales manager at Whittingham Foods, Amy
learned that potential supply problems might occur start-
ing in September as the new system was implemented at
the Whittingham’s Indianapolis plant. In order to avoid
stockouts, Juan asked Amy to provide a forecast of her
plant’s needs for September to November by April 30th,
so he could make arrangements to have product shipped
to Denniston in late August.
DENNISTON SPICESFounded in 1903 by Walter J. Denniston, Denniston Spices
was a global leader in the food industry— manufacturing,
marketing, and distributing a wide variety of spices,
mixes, condiments, and other seasoning products to the
retail, commercial, and industrial markets. Headquartered
in Chicago, the company had sales revenues of $5.5 billion
and sold its products in more than 100 countries world-
wide. Its customers included retail outlets, food manu-
facturers, restaurant chains, food distributors, and food
service businesses. Denniston Spices was also a leading
supplier of private label items.
The Phoenix plant manufactured and distributed spices,
herbs, extracts, and seasoning blends to retail and in-
dustrial customers in the southwest United States. Amy
Lin was responsible for managing approximately 300
stock-keeping units (SKUs) consisting of spices and com-
pounds, purchased from Whittingham Foods, which was
the sole supplier for these products. All SKUs supplied
to the Phoenix plant by Whittingham came from their
Indianapolis facility.
INVENTORY CONTROLIt was company policy that each SKU had minimum
safety stock inventory to protect against stockouts. Safety
stock levels were set by the materials planners and typi-
cally ranged from two to four weeks. Reorder points were
set at the safety stock level for each SKU plus four weeks,
which reflected the lead time from Whittingham Foods
for most products. Orders were constrained by minimum
order quantities set by the supplier.
Forecasting and setting reasonable safety stock levels
were made difficult because of variability in demand, par-
ticularly from industrial customers. Many of the Phoenix
plant’s industrial customers were small- and medium-
sized manufacturers that ordered sporadically.
Prices for products supplied by Whittingham Foods
ranged from $50 to $250 per pound, and had shelf-lives
of either 90, 180, or 270 days. The major challenge in
Amy’s role was to balance high inventory costs and
short shelf lives with the risks of stockout costs and in-
ventory spoilage. Denniston Spices offered 10-day de-
livery lead times to its customers and it typically took
2 to 7 days for an order to be processed and shipped.
The Phoenix plant had a customer service level target
of 98 percent.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 22joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 22 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
Chapter 1 Purchasing and Supply Management 23
INVENTORY BUILD FOR AUGUSTThe call from Juan Aranda did not come as a surprise to
Amy, who had known for several weeks that Whittingham
Foods was implementing a new ERP system and at some
point she would need to purchase additional safety stock
inventory. Whittingham Foods was as key supplier to
several Denniston plants, and switching suppliers was not
feasible for such a short period of time due to the costs
and administrative issues related to government regula-
tions regarding the certification of suppliers. While there
was a possibility they would not experience any problems
and supply would not be interrupted, Amy did not want
to take any chances and had the full support of her boss,
Kevin Sherman, the director of purchasing.
As a starting point, Amy collected demand data for
eight SKUs during July to November period in 2012 and
2013 (see Exhibit 1). For each of the eight SKUs, she
also collected information related to safety stock levels,
minimum order quantities (MOQ), shelf life, and cost per
pound. She purposely selected SKUs from different final
products that included a range of costs and annual de-
mand, with the objective of developing an inventory build
policy for the SKUs ordered from Whittingham Foods.
Amy knew that certain events in 2012 and 2013 distorted
the data. For example, the company had expanded in 2013
through an acquisition and the plant increased production
in order to build additional finished goods inventories as a
result of a facility consolidation project in the fall of 2013.
As Amy looked at the data on her spreadsheet, she
wondered if it would be possible to balance stockout risks
with inventory holding and inventory spoilage costs. It
was important that she develop a preliminary plan within
the next week so she could get it approved by the direc-
tor of purchasing and the general manager. Margins were
tight and Amy knew that she had to do her best to develop
a plan that controlled costs without jeopardizing customer
service levels.
Monthly Demand (lb.) Safety Stock (lb.)
MOQ (lb.)
Shelf Life (Days)
Cost ($/lb.)SKU # Year July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov.
W9450 2012 51 208 80 75 103 1,000 200 90 $ 902013 0 325 3,060 4,770 7,024
W9451 2012 3,251 5,794 2,492 1,830 3,052 3,600 200 90 $ 1952013 956 2,854 2,730 2,621 3,786
W9452 2012 979 680 460 894 778 600 200 180 $ 652013 360 336 282 325 550
W9453 2012 189 229 271 397 420 650 200 180 $ 1102013 549 642 1,019 1,655 2,588
W9454 2012 52 56 54 45 50 100 200 270 $ 2352013 16 76 18 0 20
W9455 2012 7 2 0 20 0 400 200 270 $ 652013 724 304 304 376 424
W9456 2012 120 4 55 1 60 15 80 270 $ 1202013 16 1 43 17 15
W9457 2012 41 157 54 117 0 320 80 270 $ 1202013 0 131 82 69 0
EXHIBIT 1 Historical Usage for Whittingham Products
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 23joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 23 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
24 Purchasing and Supply Management
Case 1–2
Erica Carson
“We will do it for 10 percent less than what you are paying
right now.” Erica Carson, purchasing manager at Wesbank,
a large western financial institution, had agreed to meet
with Art Evans, a sales representative from D.Killoran
Inc., a printing supplier from which Wesbank currently
was not buying anything. Art Evans’s impromptu and un-
solicited price quote concerned the printing and mailing of
checks from Wesbank.
Wesbank, well known for its active promotional
efforts to attract consumer deposits, provided standard
personalized consumer checks free of charge. Despite
the increasing popularity of Internet banking, the print-
ing of free checks and mailing to customers cost Wesbank
$8 million in the past year.
Erica Carson was purchasing manager in charge of
all printing for Wesbank and reported directly to the vice
president of supply.
It had been Erica’s decision to split the printing and
mailing of checks equally between two suppliers. During
the last five years, both suppliers had provided quick and
quality service, a vital concern of the bank. Almost all
checks were mailed directly to the consumer’s home or
business address by the suppliers. Because of the impor-
tance of check printing, Erica had requested a special cost
analysis study a year ago, with the cooperation of both
suppliers. The conclusion of this study had been that both
suppliers were receiving an adequate profit margin and
were efficient and cost-conscious and that the price struc-
ture was fair. Each supplier was on a two-year contract.
One supplier’s contract had been renewed eight months
ago; the other’s expired in another four months.
Erica believed that Killoran was underbidding to gain
part of the check-printing business. This in turn would
give Killoran access to Wesbank’s customers’ names.
Erica suspected that Killoran might then try to pursue
these customers more actively than the current two sup-
pliers to sell special “scenic checks” that customers paid
for themselves.
joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 24joh24099_ch01_001-024.indd 24 27/08/14 2:19 PM27/08/14 2:19 PM
25
Chapter Outline
Levels of Strategic Planning
Major Challenges in Setting Supply Objectives and Strategies
Strategic Planning in Supply Management
Risk ManagementOperational RiskFinancial RiskReputational RiskManaging Supply RiskThe Corporate Context
Strategic ComponentsWhat?Quality?
How Much?Who?When?What Price?Where?How?Why?
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases2–1 Spartan Heat Exchangers Inc.2–2 Sabor Inc.2–3 Ford Motor Company: Aligned
Business Framework
Chapter Two
Supply Strategy
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 25joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 25 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
26 Purchasing and Supply Management
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Become more concerned about the balance sheet?
• Develop a strategic plan for purchasing and supply management?
• Spend a major part of our time on strategic, rather than operational, issues?
How can we
• Anticipate the professional changes we will face in the next 10 years?
• Ensure supply is included as part of the organization’s overall strategy?
• Generate the information needed to do strategic planning?
In strategic supply, the key question is: How can supply and the supply chain contribute
effectively to organizational objectives and strategy? The accompanying question is: How
can the organizational objectives and strategy properly refl ect the contribution and oppor-
tunities offered in the supply chain?
A strategy is an action plan designed to achieve specifi c long-term goals and objectives.
The strategy should concentrate on the key factors necessary for success and the major actions that should be taken now to ensure the future. It is the process of determining the
relationship of the organization to its environment, establishing long-term objectives, and
achieving the desired relationship(s) through effi cient and effective allocation of resources.
LEVELS OF STRATEGIC PLANNING
To be successful, an organization must approach strategic planning on three levels:
1. Corporate. These are the decisions and plans that answer the questions of What busi-
ness are we in? and How will we allocate our resources among these businesses? For
example, is a railroad in the business of running trains? Or is its business the movement
(creating time and space utility) of things and people?
2. Business Unit. These decisions mold the plans of a particular business unit, as neces-
sary, to contribute to the corporate strategy.
3. Function. These plans concern the how of each functional area’s contribution to the
business strategy and involve the allocation of internal resources.
Several studies have reinforced the notion that linking supply strategy to corporate strategy
is essential, but many fi rms do not yet have mechanisms in place to link the two.1
1 R. M. Monczka and K. J. Petersen, Supply Strategy Implementation: Current State and Future Opportunities (Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2008). S. D. Hunt and D. Davis, “Grounding Supply Chain Management in Resource-Advantage Theory: In Defense of a Resource-Based View of the Firm,” Journal of Supply Chain Management 48, no. 2 (2012), pp. 14–20.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 26joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 26 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 27
Effective contribution connotes more than just a response to a directive from top man-
agement. It also implies inputs to the strategic planning process so that organizational
objectives and strategies include supply opportunities and problems.
This is graphically shown in Figure 2–1 by the use of double arrows between supply
objectives and strategy and organizational objectives and strategy.
A different look at supply strategy is given in Figure 2–2. This shows an effective
supply strategy linking both current needs and current markets to future needs and future
markets.
One of the signifi cant obstacles to the development of an effective supply strategy lies
in the diffi culties inherent in translating organizational objectives into supply objectives.
For example, Tony Brown, senior vice president of global sourcing at Ford Motor Com-
pany, was implementing a new supply strategy that he believed would improve perfor-
mance in the areas of quality, technology, delivery, cost, and speed to market. However,
the company chairman and CEO William Clay Ford Jr. will be interested in issues such as
how the new supply strategy will improve earnings per share and create shareholder value.
(See the Ford Motor Company case at the end of the chapter.)
Normally, most organizational objectives can be summarized under four categories:
survival, growth, fi nancial, and environmental. Survival is the most basic need of any or-
ganization. Growth can be expressed in a variety of ways. For example, growth could be
in size of the organization in terms of number of employees or assets or number of operat-
ing units, or number of countries in which the organization operates, or in market share.
FIGURE 2–1Supply Strategy Congruent with Organizational Strategy
FIGURE 2–2Supply Strategy Links Current and Future Markets to Current and Future Needs
Supplystrategy
Organizationalstrategy
Organizationalobjectives
Supplyobjectives
Currentmarkets
Futuremarkets
Futureneeds
Currentneeds
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 27joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 27 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
28 Purchasing and Supply Management
Financial objectives could include total size of budget, surplus or profi t, total revenue,
return on investment, return on assets, share price, earnings per share, or increases in each
of these or any combination. Environmental objectives include not only traditional envi-
ronmental concerns like clean air, water, and earth but also objectives such as the contribu-
tion to and fi t with values and ideals of the organization’s employees and customers, and
the laws and aspirations of the countries in which the organization operates. The notion of
good citizenship is embodied in this fourth objective.
Unfortunately, typical supply objectives normally are expressed in a totally different
language, such as quality and function, delivery, quantity, price, terms and conditions,
service, and so on.
MAJOR CHALLENGES IN SETTING SUPPLY OBJECTIVES AND STRATEGIES
The fi rst major challenge facing the supply manager is the effective interpretation of cor-
porate objectives and supply objectives. For example, given the organization’s desire to
expand rapidly, is supply assurance more important than obtaining “rock bottom” prices?
The second challenge deals with the choice of the appropriate action plan or strategy to
achieve the desired objectives. For example, if supply assurance is vital, is it best accom-
plished by single or dual sourcing, or by making in-house?
The third challenge deals with the identifi cation and feedback of supply issues to be in-
tegrated into organizational objectives and strategies. For example, because a new technol-
ogy can be accessed early through supply efforts, how can this be exploited? The Spartan
Heat Exchangers case at the end of this chapter provides an illustration of how supply
should be integrated to corporate strategy. The changes in corporate strategy and objectives
at Spartan necessitate changes in supply strategy.
The development of a supply strategy requires that the supply manager be in tune with
the organization’s key objectives and strategies and also be capable of recognizing and
grasping opportunities. All three challenges require managerial and strategic skills of the
highest order, and the diffi culties in meeting these challenges should not be minimized.
STRATEGIC PLANNING IN SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
Today, fi rms face the challenge of prospering in the face of highly competitive world mar-
kets. The ability to relate effectively to outside environments—social, economic, political,
legal, and technological—to anticipate changes, to adjust to changes, and to capitalize on
opportunities by formulating and executing strategic plans is a major factor in generating
future earnings and is critical to survival. Supply must be forward looking.
A supply strategy is a supply action plan designed to permit the achievement of selected
goals and objectives. If well developed, the strategy will link the fi rm to the environment as
part of the long-term planning process. An overall supply strategy is made up of substrate-
gies that can be grouped together into six major categories:
1. Assurance-of-supply strategies. Designed to ensure that future supply needs are met
with emphasis on quality and quantity. Assurance-of-supply strategies must consider
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 28joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 28 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 29
changes in both demand and supply. (Much of the work in purchasing research
[see Chapter 17] is focused on providing the relevant information.)
2. Cost-reduction strategies. Designed to reduce the laid-down cost of what is acquired
or the total cost of acquisition and use—life-cycle cost. With changes in the environ-
ment and technology, alternatives may be available to reduce an organization’s overall
operating costs through changes in materials, sources, methods, and buyer–supplier
relationships.
3. Supply chain support strategies. Designed to maximize the likelihood that the consider-
able knowledge and capabilities of supply chain members are available to the buying
organization. For example, better communication systems are needed between buyers
and sellers to facilitate the timely notification of changes and to ensure that supply
inventories and production goals are consistent with the needs. Supply chain members
also need better relations for the communication needed to ensure higher quality and
better design.
4. Environmental-change strategies. Designed to anticipate and recognize shifts in the
total environment (economic, organizational, people, legal, governmental regulations
and controls, and systems availability) so that it can turn them to the long-term advan-
tage of the buying organization.
5. Competitive-edge strategies. Designed to exploit market opportunities and organiza-
tional strengths to give the buying organization a significant competitive edge. In the
public sector, the term competitive edge usually may be interpreted to mean strong
performance in achieving program objectives.
6. Risk-management strategies. Whereas the various aspects of the previous five types of
strategies have been covered earlier in this text, the issue of risk management has not
yet been discussed. Therefore, this section will be expanded here, not to imply greater
importance, but to assure adequate coverage.
RISK MANAGEMENT
Every business decision involves risk, and supply is no exception. In fi nancial investments
a higher rate of return is supposed to compensate the investor or lender for the higher risk
exposure. Risks in the supply chain can be classifi ed into three main categories: (1) opera-
tional: the risk of interruption of the fl ow of goods or services, (2) fi nancial: the risk that the
price of the goods or services acquired will change signifi cantly, and (3) reputational risk.
All three risks affect the survival, competitiveness, and bottom line of the organization
and may occur simultaneously.
Operational RiskEvery business continuity plan recognizes that supply interruptions and delays may occur.
Catastrophic events such as earthquakes, tornadoes, hurricanes, war, fl oods, or fi re may
totally disable a vital supplier. Strikes may vary in length, and even short-term interrup-
tions related to weather, accidents on key roads, or any other short-term factor affecting
the supply and/or transport of requirements may affect a buying organization’s capability
to provide good customer service.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 29joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 29 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
30 Purchasing and Supply Management
A distinction can be drawn between factors beyond the purchaser’s or supplier’s con-
trol, such as weather, and those that deal directly with the supplier’s capability of selecting
its own suppliers, managing internally, and its distribution so as to prevent the potential
of physical supply interruption. Careful supplier evaluation before committing to purchase
can mitigate against the latter type of supply interruption. In situations of ongoing sup-
ply relationships, communication with key suppliers is essential. Such is the situation in
the Sabor case at the end of the chapter. Ray Soles is concerned about the potential short-
age of a key raw material and must come to an agreement with his suppliers to avoid pos-
sible supply disruptions.
Unfortunately, supply interruptions increase costs. If last-minute substitutions need to
be made, these are likely to be expensive. Idle labor and equipment, missed customer de-
livery promises, and scrambling—all have increased costs associated with them.
Financial RiskQuite different from supply interruptions are those risks directly associated with changes in
the price of the good or service purchased. A simple example comes from the commodity
markets. Increases in the price of oil affect prices paid for fuel, energy, and those products
or services that require oil as a key ingredient or raw material.
A purchaser who has committed to a fi xed-price contract may fi nd a competitor able to
compete because commodity prices have dropped. Currency exchange rate changes and the
threat of shortages or supply interruption also will affect prices, as will arbitrary supplier
pricing decisions. Changes in taxation, tolls, fees, duties, and tariffs also will affect cost
of ownership.
Given that both supply interruption and price/cost risks directly impact any organiza-
tion’s ability to meet its own goals and execute its strategies, supply chain risks—whether
they are on the supply side, internal to the organization, or on the customer side—need to
be managed properly.
Reputational RiskReputational risk may be even more serious than operational or fi nancial risks, because the
loss of reputation may be catastrophic for a company. Both legal and ethical supply issues
may affect the company’s reputation. “You are known by the company you keep” applies
not only to one’s personal life, but also to corporate life. Thus, the reputation of a com-
pany’s supply chain members will affect its own image. The internal and external commu-
nications decisions and behavior of supply personnel can have both negative and positive
impacts. Therefore, the content of the legal issues and ethics (Chapter 15) is highly relevant
to reputational risk. Adverse publicity with respect to bribery, kickbacks, improper qual-
ity, improper disposal and environmental practices, dealings with unethical suppliers, and
so on, can be extremely damaging.
Managing Supply RiskManaging supply risks require: (1) identifi cation and classifi cation of the risks, (2) impact
assessment, and (3) a risk strategy.
Given that supply is becoming more and more global and supply networks more
complex, risk identifi cation is also becoming more diffi cult. The preceding discussion
identifying supply interruption and price/cost changes as two categories has been highly
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 30joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 30 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 31
simplifi ed. Technology, social, political, and environmental factors have not even been
mentioned yet. Technology has the potential of interrupting supply through the failure of
systems and through obsoleting existing equipment, products, or services, or drastically
changing the existing cost/price realities. A purchaser committed to a long-term, fi xed-
price contract for a particular requirement may fi nd a competitor can gain a signifi cant
advantage through a technology-driven, lower-cost substitute. Environmental regulation
changes can drastically offset a supplier’s capability to deliver at the expected price or to
deliver at all.
Because the well-informed supply manager is probably in the best position to identify
the various supply risks his or her organization faces, such risk identifi cation should be
a standard requirement of the job, including the estimation of the probability of event
occurrence.
Impact assessment requires the ability to assess the consequences of supply interrup-
tion and/or price/cost exposure. Correct impact assessment is likely to require the input of
others in the organization, such as operations, marketing, accounting, and fi nance, to name
just a few. Assessed potential impact from identifi ed risk may be low, medium, or high.
Combining potential impact assessment with the probability of event exposure creates
a table of risks with low probability and low impact on one extreme and high probability
with high impact on the other.
Obviously, high-impact, high-probability risks need to be addressed or, better yet,
avoided, if at all possible.
Managing supply risks should be started at the supply level, but may escalate to the
overall corporate level. Relatively simple actions such as avoiding high-risk suppliers or
high-risk geographical locations, dual or triple sourcing, carrying safety stock, hedging,
and using longer-term and/or fi xed- or declining-price contracts and protective contract
clauses have been a standard part of the procurement arsenal for a long time. If most pur-
chasers had their way, they would like to transfer all risk to their suppliers! However, the
assumption of risk carries a price tag, and a supplier should be asked to shoulder the risk if
it is advantageous to both the supplier and purchaser to do so.
The Corporate ContextSupply risk is only one of the various risks to which any organization is exposed. Tradi-
tionally, fi nancial risks have been the responsibility of fi nance, property insurance part of
real estate, and so on. The emergence of a corporate risk management group headed by a
risk manager or chief risk offi cer (CRO) allows companies as a whole to assess their total
risk exposure and seek the best ways of managing all risks.
A supply manager’s decision not to source in a politically unstable country because of
his or her fear of supply interruption may also miss an opportunity to source at a highly ad-
vantageous price. A corporate perspective might show that the trade-off between a higher
price elsewhere and the risk of nonsupply favors the apparently riskier option. Mergers
and acquisitions as well as insourcing and outsourcing represent phenomena full of op-
portunities and risks in which supply input is vital to effective corporate risk resolution.
The decision about how much risk any organization should be willing to bear and whether
it should self-insure or seek third-party protection is well beyond the scope of this text.
Nevertheless, it is clear that risk management is going to be an area of growing concern
for supply managers.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 31joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 31 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
32 Purchasing and Supply Management
Figure 2–3 is a conceptual fl ow diagram of the strategic supply planning process. It
is important to recognize that the planning process normally focuses on long-run oppor-tunities and not primarily on immediate problems.
STRATEGIC COMPONENTS
The number of specifi c strategic opportunities that might be addressed in formulat-
ing an overall supply strategy is limited only by the imagination of the supply man-
ager. Any strategy chosen should include a determination of what, quality, how much,
who, when, what price, where, how, and why. Each of these will be discussed further.
(See Figure 2–4.)
What?Probably the most fundamental question facing an organization under the “what” category is
the issue of make or buy, insourcing, and outsourcing. Presumably, strong acquisition strengths
would favor a buy strategy. (See Chapter 5: Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing.)
Also included under the heading of what is to be acquired is the issue of whether the
organization will acquire standard items and materials readily available in the market, as
opposed to special, custom-specifi ed requirements. Standard items may be readily acquired
in the marketplace, but they may not afford the organization the competitive edge that
special requirements might provide.
FIGURE 2–3Strategic Supply Planning Process
Restateorganizational goals
Determine supplyobjectives to contributeto organizational goals
Isolate factors affectingachievement of
supply objectives
Identify andanalyze alternatives
Determinesupply
strategy
Review implementationfactors
Gain commitmentand implement
Evaluate
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 32joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 32 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 33
1. What? Make or buy Standard versus special2. Quality? Quality versus cost Supplier involvement3. How Much? Large versus small quantities (inventory)4. Who? Centralize or decentralize Location of staff Top management involvement5. When? Now versus later Forward buy6. What Price? Premium Standard Lower Cost-based Market-based Lease/make/buy7. Where? Local versus regional Domestic versus international Large versus small
Single versus multiple sourcing High versus low supplier turnover Supplier relations Supplier certifi cation Supplier ownership8. How? Systems and procedures E-commerce Negotiations Competitive bids Fixed bids Blanket orders/open orders Systems contracting Group buying Materials requirements planning Long-term contracts Ethics Aggressive or passive Purchasing research Value analysis9. Why? Objectives congruent Market reasons Internal reasons 1. Outside supply 2. Inside supply
Quality?Part of the “what” question deals with the quality of the items or services to be acquired.
Chapter 7 addresses the various trade-offs possible under quality. The intent is to achieve
continuous process and product or service improvement.
Supplier Quality Assurance ProgramsMany fi rms have concluded that a more consistent quality of end-product output is abso-
lutely essential to the maintenance of, or growth in, market share. Suppliers must deliver
consistent quality materials, parts, and components; this also will effect a marked reduction
in production costs and in-house quality control administrative costs. Therefore, a strategy
of developing suppliers’ knowledge of quality requirements and assisting them in imple-
mentation of programs to achieve desired results may be needed. Three of the programs
that might be used are:
1. Zero defect (ZD) plans. “Do it right the first time” is far more cost effective than mak-
ing corrections after the fact.
2. Process quality control programs. These use statistical control charts to monitor vari-
ous production processes to isolate developing problems and make needed adjustments
FIGURE 2–4Supply Strategy Questions
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 33joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 33 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
34 Purchasing and Supply Management
(corrections) before bad product is produced. The buying firm may need to assist the
supplier with the introduction of the needed statistical techniques.
3. Quality certification programs. Here the supplier agrees to perform the agreed-upon
quality tests and supply the test data, with the shipment, to the buying firm. If the seller
does the requisite outgoing quality checks and can be depended on to do them correctly,
the buying firm then can eliminate its incoming inspection procedures and attendant
costs. This approach almost always is a key element in any just-in-time purchasing
system, as discussed in the following section.
How Much?Another major component of any supply strategy deals with the question of how much is
to be acquired in total and per delivery. Chapter 8 discussed a number of trade-offs pos-
sible under quantity. In JIT and MRP, the trend has been toward smaller quantities to be
delivered as needed, as opposed to the former stance of buying large quantities at a time to
ensure better prices. Ideally, buyers and suppliers try to identify and eliminate the causes of
uncertainty in the supply chain that drive the need for inventory, thus reducing the amount
of inventory in the total system. One option available under the how much question may
involve the shifting of inventory ownership.
The supplier maintains fi nished goods inventory because the supplier may be supply-
ing a common item to several customers. The safety stock required to service a group of
customers may be much less than the combined total of the safety stocks if the several
customers were to manage their own inventories separately. This concept is integral to the
successful implementation of systems contracting (discussed in Chapter 4).
From a strategic standpoint, supply may wish to analyze its inventory position on all
of its major items, with a view to working out an arrangement with key suppliers whereby
they agree to maintain the inventory, physically and fi nancially, with delivery as required.
Ideally, of course, the intent of both buyer and supplier should be to take inventory out
of the system. An area in the buyer’s facility may even be placed under the supplier’s
control.
Walmart and Zara are examples of two companies that have tailored their supply chains
to create competitive advantage. Both companies, albeit in different industries, are able
to keep inventories low, while maintaining customer services levels that match or exceed
their competitors.
Other options are to switch to JIT purchasing or to consignment buying. If a supplier
can be depended on to deliver needed purchased items, of the agreed-upon quality, in small
quantities, and at the specifi ed time, the buying fi rm can substantially reduce its investment
in purchased inventories, enjoy needed continuity of supply, and reduce its receiving and
incoming inspection costs. To accomplish this requires a long-term plan and substantial
cooperation and understanding between buyer and seller.
In consignment buying, a supplier owns inventory in the buyer’s facility under the
buyer’s control. The buyer assumes responsibility for accounting for withdrawals of stock
from that consignment inventory, payment for quantities used, and notifi cation to the sup-
plier of the need to replenish inventory. Verifi cation of quantities remaining in inventory
then would be done jointly, at periodic intervals. This strategy has advantages for both
supplier (assured volume) and buyer (reduced inventory investment) and is often used in
the distribution industry.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 34joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 34 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 35
Who?The whole question of who should do the buying and how to organize the supply function
has been addressed in Chapter 3. The key decisions are whether the supply function should
be centralized or not, where staff should be located geographically, and to what extent top
management and other functions will be involved in the total acquisition process. To what
extent will teams be used to arrive at supply strategies?
When?The question of when to buy is tied very closely to the one of how much. The obvious
choices are now versus later. The key strategy issue really lies with the question of forward
buying and inventory policy. In the area of commodities, the opportunity exists to go into
the futures market and use hedging. The organized commodity exchanges present an op-
portunity to offset transactions in the spot and future markets to avoid some of the risk of
substantial price fl uctuation as discussed in Chapter 10.
What Price?It is possible for any organization to follow some specifi c price strategies. This topic
already has been extensively discussed in Chapter 11. Key trade-offs may be whether
the organization intends to pursue paying a premium price in return for exceptional
service and other commitments from the supplier, a standard price target in line with
the rest of the market, or a low price intended to give a cost advantage. Furthermore,
the pursuit of a cost-based strategy as opposed to a market-based strategy may require
extensive use of tools such as value analysis, cost analysis, and negotiation. For capi-
tal assets, the choice of lease or own presents strategic alternatives, as discussed in
Chapter 16.
Where?Several possibilities present themselves under the question of where to buy. Many of these
are discussed in Chapter 12 under “Source Selection.” Obvious trade-offs include local,
regional, domestic, or international sourcing; buying from small versus large suppliers;
single versus multiple sourcing; and low versus high supplier turnover, as well as supplier
certifi cation and supplier ownership. Lastly, through reverse marketing or supplier devel-
opment, the purchaser may create rather than select suppliers.
How?A large array of options exists under the heading of “how to buy.” These include, but certainly
are not limited to, supply chain management integration systems and procedures; choice of
technology; e-commerce applications; use of various types of teams; use of negotiations,
auctions, competitive bids, blanket orders, and open order systems; systems contracting;
group buying; long-term contracts; the ethics of acquisition; aggressive or passive buying;
the use of purchasing research and value analysis; quality assurance programs; and reduc-
tion of the supply base. Most of these will be discussed in Chapters 3 through 12 in this text.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 35joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 35 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
36 Purchasing and Supply Management
Why?Every strategy needs to be examined not only for its various optional components, but also
for the reason why it should be pursued. The normal reason for a strategy in supply is to
make supply objectives congruent with overall organizational objectives and strategies at
both an operational and strategic level. Other reasons may include market conditions, both
current and future. Furthermore, there may be reasons internal to the organization, both
outside of supply and inside supply, to pursue certain strategies. For example, a strong
engineering department may afford an opportunity to pursue a strategy based on specially
engineered requirements. The availability of excess funds may afford an opportunity to
acquire a supplier through backward/vertical integration. The reasons inside supply may
be related to the capability and availability of supply personnel. A highly trained and ef-
fective supply group can pursue much more aggressive strategies than one less qualifi ed.
Other reasons may include the environment. For example, government regulations and
controls in product liability and environmental protection may require the pursuit of certain
strategies.
What makes supply strategy such an exciting area for exploration is the combination
of the multitude of strategic options coupled with the size of potential impact on corporate
success. The combination of sound supply expertise with creative thinking and full under-
standing of corporate objectives and strategies can uncover strategic opportunities of a size
and impact not available elsewhere in the organization.
Conclusion The increasing interest in supply strategies and their potential contribution to organiza-
tional objectives and strategies is one of the exciting developments in the whole field
of supply. Fortunately, as this chapter indicates, the number of strategic options open to
any supply manager is almost endless. A significant difficulty may exist in making these
strategies congruent with those of the organization as a whole. The long-term perspective
required for effective supply strategy development will force supply managers to concen-
trate more on the future. The coming decade should be a highly rewarding one for those
supply managers willing to accept the challenge of realizing the full potential of supply’s
contribution to organizational success.
1. What role can (should) supply play in determining a firm’s strategy in the area of
social and environmental issues and trends?
2. How can the supply manager determine which cost-reduction strategies to pursue?
3. Can you have a supply strategy in public procurement? Why or why not?
4. Why should a supply manager consider hiring (or obtaining internally) an employee
without any supply background?
5. What can supply do to assist in minimizing a firm’s risk of product liability lawsuits?
6. What factors have caused the current interest in, and attention to, strategic purchasing
and supply planning?
Questions for Review and Discussion
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 36joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 36 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
7. What type of data would supply need to contribute to an organization’s strategic
growth? How might supply obtain such data?
8. How can supply sell itself more effectively internally?
9. What do you believe to be the most difficult obstacles to making a supply function
strategic?
10. Why should supply be concerned about the balance sheet?
Carter, P. L.; R. M. Monczka; G. L. Ragatz; and P. L. Jennings. Supply Chain Integration: Challenges and Good Practices. Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2009.
Cox, A. Strategic Sourcing. Warwickshire, UK: Earlsgate Press, 2008.
Hallikas, J.; A. K. Kähkönen; K. Lintukangas; and V. M. Virolainen, “Supply
Management—Missing Link in Strategic Management?” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 17, no. 3 (2011), pp. 145–147.
Hitt, M. A., “The Relevance of Strategic Management Theory and Research for Supply
Chain Management,” Journal of Supply Chain Management 47, no. 1 (2011), pp. 9–13.
Johnson, P. F., and M. R. Leenders. “Minding the Supply Savings Gaps.” MIT Sloan Management Review 51, no. 2 (2010), pp. 25–31.
Johnson, P. F., and M. R. Leenders. Supply Leadership Changes. Tempe, AZ: CAPS
Research, March 2007, 106 pages.
Monczka, R. M.; P. L. Carter; and W. J. Markham. Risk Management Across the Extended Value Chain. Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, June 2012.
Monczka, R. M. and K. J. Petersen. Supply Strategy Implementation: Current State and Future Opportunities. Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2008.
Zsidisin, G. A.; G. L. Ragatz; and S. A. Melnyk. “The Dark Side of Supply Chain
Management.” Supply Chain Management Review 9, no. 2 (2005), pp. 46–52.
References
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 37
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 37joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 37 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
38 Purchasing and Supply Management
Case 2–1
Spartan Heat Exchangers Inc.
On June 10, Rick Coyne, materials manager at Spartan
Heat Exchangers Inc. (Spartan), in Springfield, Missouri,
received a call from Max Brisco, vice president of manu-
facturing: “What can the materials department do to fa-
cilitate Spartan’s new business strategy? I’ll need your
plan next week.”
SPARTAN HEAT EXCHANGERSSpartan was a leading designer and manufacturer of spe-
cialized industrial heat transfer equipment. Its customers
operated in a number of industries, such as steel, alumi-
num smelting, hydro electricity generation, pulp and pa-
per, refining, and petrochemical. The company’s primary
products included transformer coolers, motor and gen-
erator coolers, hydro generator coolers, air cooled heat
exchangers, and transformer oil coolers. Spartan’s com-
bination of fin-tube and time-proven heat exchanger de-
signs had gained wide recognition both in North America
and internationally.
Sales revenues were $25 million and Spartan oper-
ated in a 125,000-square-foot plant. Spartan was owned
by Krimmer Industries, a large privately held corporation
with more than 10,000 employees worldwide, headquar-
tered in Denver.
Rick Coyne summarized the business strategy of Spar-
tan during the past 10 years: “We were willing to do any-
thing for every customer with respect to their heat transfer
requirements. We were willing to do trial and error on the
shop floor and provide a customer with his or her own
unique heat transfer products.” He added, “Our design
and manufacturing people derived greatest satisfaction
making new customized heat transfer products. Design-
ing and research capabilities gave us the edge in develop-
ing and manufacturing any kind of heat transfer product
required by the customer. Ten years ago, we were one of
the very few companies in our industry offering custom-
ized services in design and manufacturing and this strat-
egy made business sense, as the customers were willing to
pay a premium for customized products.”
MANUFACTURING PROCESSThe customized nature of Spartan’s product line was sup-
ported by a job shop manufacturing operation with several
departments, each of which produced particular component
parts, feeding a final assembly area. Each job moved from
work center to work center, accompanied by a bill of mate-
rial and engineering drawing. The first process involved fit-
ting a liner tube (in which the fluid to be cooled passed) into
a base tube. This base tube, made of aluminum, was then
pressure bonded to the inner liner tube through a rotary ex-
trusion process that formed spiral fins on the base tube. The
depth of the fins and the distance between them determined
the amount of airflow across the tubes, and thus the cooling
efficiency and power of the unit.
After the tubes were formed, cabinet and end plate fab-
rication began. The tubes were welded to the cabinet and
the end plates. Flanges were then welded to pairs of tubes
on the other side of the end plates to create a looped sys-
tem. The unit was then painted and fans and motors were
installed. Finally, the unit was tested for leaks and perfor-
mance, crated, and shipped to the job site for installation.
MATERIALS DEPARTMENTSpartan’s buyers sourced all raw material and compo-
nents required by manufacturing and were responsible for
planning, procurement, and management of inventories.
Rick managed an in-house warehouse used for hous-
ing the raw material inventories, maintained adequate
buffer inventories, and executed purchase contracts with
vendors, ensuring specifications were met while achiev-
ing the best possible price. Rick’s department included
two buyers, a material control clerk, an expediter, and
two shippers-receivers.
It was common for Spartan to have multiple vendors
for raw material supply, and the materials group used more
than 350 vendors for its raw materials, with current lead
times ranging from a few days to six weeks. This wide
supplier base was necessitated by the customization strat-
egy adopted by the company. Rick noted that approximate-
ly 35 percent of Spartan’s purchases were for aluminum
products, mainly tubes and sheets. On average the plant
had $3.5 million worth of inventory, in the form of both
raw and work in process. Raw material inventory consti-
tuted approximately 40 percent of the total. Rick estimated
that Spartan had inventory turns of four times per year,
which he believed was comparable to the competition.
Manufacturing operations regularly complained about
material shortages and stockouts, and regular inventory audits
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 38joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 38 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 39
indicated significant discrepancies with inventory records on
the company’s computer system. Furthermore, a significant
amount of stock was written off each year due to obsoles-
cence. Rick suspected that production staff regularly re-
moved stock without proper documentation and that workers
frequently deviated from established bills of material.
NEW BUSINESS STRATEGYCompetition in the heat exchanger industry had increased
dramatically over the past decade, with much of the new
competition coming from Korea and Europe. Korean
firms, with their low cost base, competed primarily on
price, while European firms focused on standardizing their
product lines to a few high-volume products and competed
on delivery lead time and price. Spartan’s competitors
in Europe used assembly-line manufacturing processes,
rather than batch or job shop operations.
Senior management viewed the competition from
Europe and Korea as an imminent threat. Many of Spar-
tan’s customers had recently developed aggressive ex-
pectations regarding pricing and delivery lead times, and
some key customers had decided to opt for standard prod-
uct design, sacrificing custom design for lower cost and
faster delivery.
The changing nature of the industry forced senior man-
agement to reexamine their business strategy. As a result,
in January, a multidiscipline task force representing en-
gineering, manufacturing, and sales was formed with the
mandate to formulate a new five-year business strategy.
The new corporate strategy was finalized in May and
reviewed with the management group on June 1 in an
all-day staff meeting. The central theme of the new strat-
egy was standardization of all product lines, in terms of
both design and manufacturing, reducing variety to three
or four basic lines for each product category. The sales
department would no longer accept orders for specialized
designs. The aim of the new strategy was to reduce the
delivery lead time from 14 weeks to 6 weeks and to lower
production costs dramatically.
NEW CHALLENGES FOR THE MATERIALS DEPARTMENTMax Brisco indicated that he expected the materials group
to play a major role in support of the new corporate strategy
and needed to know by next week the specifics of Rick’s
plan. The task force had set a number of ambitious targets.
First, customer lead times for finished products were to be
reduced to six weeks from the current average of 14 weeks.
Second, the new objective for inventory turns was 20 times.
Meanwhile, raw material stockouts were to be eliminated.
Third, Max believed that product standardization also
would provide opportunities to reduce costs for purchased
goods. He expected that costs for raw materials and compo-
nents could be cut by 10 percent over the next 12 months.
Rick fully supported the new direction that the com-
pany was taking and saw this as an opportunity to make
major changes. He knew that Max would want the specif-
ics of his plan during the meeting in a week’s time.
Case 2–2
Sabor Inc.In mid-April, Ray Soles, vice president of supply chain
management at Sabor Inc., had become increasingly con-
cerned about the potential shortage of supply of marco-
nil, a new high-tech raw material for air filtration. Sabor
Inc.’s three suppliers, during the last two weeks, had ad-
vised Ray Soles to sign long-term contracts and he was
trying to assess the advisability of such commitments.
SABOR INC.Sabor Inc. of Cleveland, Ohio, produced high-quality con-
sumer and industrial air conditioning and heating units. An
extensive network of independent and company-owned
installation and sales centers serviced customers through-
out the North American market. Total company sales last
year totaled $800 million.
AIR FILTRATION AND MARCONILSabor Inc. for decades had sold air humidification and
air filtration units along with its prime units in air heat-
ing and cooling. Until three years ago, air filtration had
accounted for about 7 percent of total corporate sales and
had been sold primarily as add-ons to a new air cooling/
heating system. However, with the advent of marconil,
air filtration had started to increase significantly as a per-
centage of total sales. Marconil, a new high-tech product
developed as part of the U.S. space effort, had a range of
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 39joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 39 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
40 Purchasing and Supply Management
unique properties of high interest to a variety of indus-
tries. In the case of air filtration, when processed by a Sabor
Inc. developed and patented process, marconil could be
transformed into a thin, very light, and extremely fine
meshlike sponge material capable of filtering extremely
small particles.
Given the population’s sensitivity to air quality and
the increasing number of people with asthma and aller-
gies, the new Sabor filters became popular, not only with
new Sabor air system installations but also as retrofits in
older air conditioning and heating systems. Moreover,
compared to electronic air cleaners that cost about
three times as much to install and required monthly
cleaning, marconil filters had to be replaced every six
months, guaranteeing a continued sales volume of filters
for years to come. When combined with an ultraviolet
light unit, which killed airborne bacteria, a marconil air
cleaning system was considered a huge leap forward in
air treatment.
The manufacturing cost of a marconil filter accounted
for about 28 percent of its selling price.
AIR FILTRATION SALESAlong with the marconil filtration system introduction
three years ago, Sabor’s marketing department had initi-
ated a significant promotional campaign directed at both
the industrial and consumer sectors. Marketing’s ability to
forecast sales accurately had not been impressive, accord-
ing to Ray Soles. For the first year, marketing had forecast
marconil filter sales at $1 million, when in reality they
sold $11 million. In the second year, the forecast was for
$15 million and actual sales were $29 million, and, in the
third year, a forecast of $40 million turned into actual sales
of $72 million. The marketing department expected sales
growth to level off over the next three years to a rate of
20 percent per year.
MARCONIL SUPPLYSabor’s first marconil supplier was Bilt Chemical, a
longtime supplier of paints and adhesives to Sabor and
a large, diversified, innovative chemical producer that
held the patent on marconil. Ray Soles did not like the
idea of single sourcing and, therefore, when marconil
requirements rose significantly in the second year, he
brought in a second supplier, Warton Inc., which not
only produced the marconil raw materials (under license
from Bilt Chemical), but also manufactured a variety of
marconil products in the textile and automotive fields.
In the third year, Ray had secured a third supplier, G. K.
Specialties, a much smaller company than Bilt Chemi-
cal and Warton Inc., which also produced marconil un-
der license for its own applications in aerospace and the
military, but which had some excess capacity that it sold
on the open market.
All three suppliers sold marconil at identical prices,
which had increased over the past three years. Actual
volumes purchased by Sabor Inc. from each of the three
suppliers were as shown in Exhibit 1. The current price of
marconil from all three suppliers was $50.00.
SUPPLIER PROPOSALS FOR LONG-TERM CONTRACTSDuring the first two weeks of April, Ray Soles was visited
by each of his current three marconil suppliers with Bilt
Chemical first. Each warned that a shortage of marconil
supply was looming and that unless Ray was willing to
sign a long-term contract, they would not be in a position
to guarantee supply. However, each proposal was different.
Bilt Chemical proposed a five-year contract with take-
or-pay commitments of 25,000 pounds for the current
year and 20 percent annual increases in volume for each
of the following years. Prices were subject to escalation
EXHIBIT 1 Sabor Marconil Purchases and Prices
Purchases (in pounds)
CapacityCompany (in pounds) Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Bilt Chemical 80,000 5,000 10,000 20, 000Warton Inc. 40,000 0 3,000 8, 000G. K. Specialties 20,000 0 4, 000Prices $39.00 $42.00 $ 44.00
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 40joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 40 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 41
for energy, raw material, and labor every quarter based on
the current $50.00 price per pound.
Warton Inc. proposed a two-year contract for 10,000
pounds each year with similar price provisions to those
of Bilt Chemical.
G. K. Specialties suggested an agreement for 12.5 per-
cent of Sabor’s annual requirements, which could be dropped
at any time by either party, but which proposed a price of
$56.00 for the current year, to be adjusted semiannually,
thereafter based on inflation, energy, labor, and material.
Although Ray Soles did not know much about the
actual manufacturing process for marconil, he had heard
that increases in capacity were expensive. He also under-
stood that two of the three component raw materials for
marconil were by-products from industrial processes that
were reasonably stable.
Since Ray Soles had been able to buy almost all of
Sabor’s needs on quarterly, semiannual, or annual contracts,
he was not particularly keen on departing from his current
supply practice. He had heard some rumors that in a few
years a much lower-cost substitute for marconil might be
developed. He suspected that, therefore, his current suppliers
were anxious to tie Sabor to a long-term commitment.
APRIL 15On April 15, the Bilt Chemical sales representative sent
an e-mail to Ray Soles requesting a meeting on April 22.
The e-mail concluded, “I would like to bring my sales
manager so that we may discuss our proposal for the
marconil with you. We will not be able to guarantee you
supply after August 1, if you are unable to commit.”
Case 2–3
Ford Motor Company: Aligned Business Framework2
Tony Brown, senior vice president of global sourcing
at Ford Motor Company (Ford), was putting the finish-
ing touches on his plan for the company’s new supply
chain strategy—“Aligned Business Framework” (ABF).
ABF was a bold step that would significantly change
the relationships between Ford and its suppliers. Tony
described his motivation: “We want to operate a supply
chain management system that delivers on the dimen-
sions of quality, technology, delivery and cost, while
executing programs in a disciplined fashion with faster
time-to-market.”3
It was August 10, 2005, and Tony was expected to re-
view the final details of his proposal with company chair-
man and CEO William Clay (Bill) Ford Jr. before making
a formal public announcement the following month. ABF
would substantially reduce the number of suppliers and give
those that remained long-term contracts and early involve-
ment in new product development programs. Tony expected
that the strategy would provide benefits to Ford through
overall lower costs, while suppliers would benefit from
long-term financial stability and profitability. The question
remained, however, how he would convince Ford’s supplier
community to commit to the principles of ABF.
FORD MOTOR COMPANYFounded in 1903, Ford was the no. 2 U.S. automaker with
global sales of approximately $177 billion. In 2005, its
global brands included Ford, Lincoln, Mercury, Jaguar,
Land Rover, Aston Martin, and Volvo.4 In recent years all
of the “Detroit 3” (General Motors, Ford, and Chrysler)
automakers were struggling under intense global com-
petition, rising fuel prices, and steep product discounts
and rebates. In the most recent quarter, Ford reported a
$1.1 billion operating loss and the company’s debt had
recently been downgraded to junk-bond status. To turn
around company performance, Ford had announced plans
to cut its salaried workforce, reduce capacity by closing
plants and selling the Hertz rental car division, and ramp
up production of hybrid vehicles.5
2 This case has been written on the basis of published sources only. Consequently, the interpretation and perspectives presented in this case are not necessarily those of Ford Motor Company or any of its employees.
3 Tom Stundza, “Ford Has a Better Idea,” Purchasing 135, no. 12 (2006), p. 49.4 Ford Motor Company 2005 annual report.5 Jeffrey McCracken, “Ford Retools: Seeks Big Savings by Shaking Up Parts Supply System,” The Globe & Mail, September 29,
2005, p. B19.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 41joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 41 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
42 Purchasing and Supply Management
ALIGNED BUSINESS FRAMEWORK (ABF)The Ford global supply chain included approximately
2,500 production and 9,000 nonproduction suppliers, with
operations in more than 60 countries, supporting 107 Ford
manufacturing sites. Total purchases in 2005 were more
than $90 billion for roughly 250 production commodi-
ties (e.g., seats, heating and cooling systems, advanced
electronics, and steering systems) and 500 nonproduc-
tion commodities (e.g., health care, software, logistics,
and marketing and advertising services). The more than
130,000 active production parts accounted for approxi-
mately $70 billion of total annual purchases.6
Historically Ford leaned heavily on suppliers for
annual across-the-board price reductions that averaged
approximately 3 percent, although requests for more
substantial reductions were commonplace. This environ-
ment had created contemptuous relationships between
Ford and its suppliers, which were reinforced through
annual performance evaluations and bonuses for buyers
based on achieving year-over-year price reduction ob-
jectives. The foundation of the new ABF strategy was
a cultural shift from confrontational to collaborative
supplier relationships. Tony commented on his assess-
ment of Ford’s current supply chain strategy: “We have
a problem with the business model in this industry. It is
not working effectively for our suppliers. It is not work-
ing effectively for us. When my day is dominated by
issues related to financially distressed suppliers, com-
modity price shocks, quality problems and costs issues,
it’s clear to me that there must be a better approach.”7
ABF targeted companywide cost reductions of
10 percent of Ford’s annual spend of production parts
by 2010—$7 billion per year—by adopting what Tony
considered best practices approach to supply chain
management and supplier partnerships: “It’s an envi-
ronment between Ford and a select family of suppliers
where innovative ideas can emerge, and then be incu-
bated, evaluated and incorporated into our products.”8
Under the new system, preferred suppliers would be
matched with Ford purchasing and engineering manag-
ers to work on projects to achieve quality, cost, and de-
livery goals. The 20 key elements of the ABF that Tony
planned to propose are provided in Exhibit 1, which
Brown described as “a kinder, gentler era of coopera-
tion from global suppliers that can be implemented be-
yond North America.”9
6 www.ford.com/aboutford/microsites/sustainability-report-2006-07.
7 Stundza, “Ford Has a Better Idea, p. 49.
8 Ibid.
9 Ibid.10 Presentation by Tony Brown, October 7, 2005, www.oesa.org/cmspages/getAttch.php?id=180.
EXHIBIT 1 Key Elements of ABF10
Ford Commitments Bilateral Commitments Supplier Commitments
• Up-front reimbursement of supplier engineering, design, and testing
• Long-term sourcing• Improved commonality and
reuse• Improved product, cycle plan,
and forecast volume stability• Sharing of forecast volumes and
product plans (beyond 3 years)• More disciplined program ex-
ecution through Ford Global Product Development system
• Achieve best-in-class quality• Data transparency• Agree on detailed cost models• Focus on total costs, included
elimination of emphasis on bins• Competitive cost at Job no. 1,
with less emphasis on year-over-year price reductions
• Open collaboration on global manufacturing, engineering footprint
• Ongoing senior leadership communication
• Data exchange remains confi dential
• Share current fi nancial data to demonstrate health
• Backstop other commodity suppliers
• Manage and assure proper working conditions in their facilities and in the facilities of sub-tiers
• Sourcing of minority- and women-owned suppliers
• Use mutually agreeable multi-party agreement in directed tier 2 sourcing scenarios
• Technological innovations will be provided to Ford
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 42joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 42 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
Chapter 2 Supply Strategy 43
Tony was proposing that in the first phase of the ABF
implementation, his supply organization would focus on
20 high-impact commodity groups, such as seats, tires,
and bumpers, where the automaker spent approximately
$35 billion per year with 200 suppliers. The plan was to
reduce the number of suppliers for these commodities to
100 by the 2009 model year. In the long term, Tony’s
objective was to shrink the production supply base from
2,500 to 1,000.11
FINALIZING THE PLANTony recognized that there would be a great many ques-
tions from other Ford executives, members of his pur-
chasing organization and suppliers regarding how ABF
would be implemented. There were obviously going to be
winners and losers from the existing Ford supplier com-
munity under ABF and many of Ford’s existing suppliers
would have to be told that they would not be participating
in future programs. The preferred suppliers would have
many questions regarding how their relationships would
function with Ford in the future. For example, it was ex-
pected that suppliers would benefit from higher capacity
utilization as a result of the increased production vol-
umes. Furthermore, additional benefits were anticipated
from greater collaboration, early supplier involvement in
new product development, and supplier innovation. How
would the associated costs and benefits be measured and
shared among Ford and its suppliers?
Ford had a decades-long tradition of confrontational
relationships with its supplier community. A recent sur-
vey of North American automotive tier 1 suppliers ranked
Ford second to last with a score of 157 versus top-ranked
Toyota at 415 and Honda at 375 (scale: 500 5 very good,
0 5 very poor).12 Turning around relationships with sup-
pliers could take years. Given the difficult times in the
industry and at Ford, Tony knew that Bill Ford would
have questions about supplier skepticism regarding the
company’s motivations behind ABF and how quickly the
plan would start to show results.
Tony Brown believed that it was necessary to make
major changes to Ford’s supply chain if the company was
going to survive. As he got ready for his meeting with
Mr. Ford, Tony pondered how he should proceed with
implementation, and specifically how suppliers could be
convinced to buy into the principles of ABF. Tony com-
mented on the challenges that ABF presented: “This is not
business as usual. We’re not only asking our suppliers to
step up. We’re also asking ourselves to step up.”13
11 Jeffrey McCracken, “Ford Retools: Seeks Big Savings by Shaking Up Parts Supply System,” p. B19.12 John Henke, Planning Perspectives, Birmingham, Michigan, 2008.13 “Ford Key Suppliers Roll Out Innovative Business Model,” Ford Motor Company press release, September 29, 2005, http://
media.ford.com .newsroom/release.
joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 43joh24099_ch02_025-043.indd 43 27/08/14 2:20 PM27/08/14 2:20 PM
44
Chapter Three
Supply Organization
Chapter Outline
Objectives of Supply Management
Organizational Structures for Supply ManagementSmall and Medium-Sized OrganizationsLarge OrganizationsCentralized and Decentralized Supply
StructuresHybrid Supply StructureSpecialization within the Supply
FunctionStructure for Direct and Indirect
SpendManaging Organizational Change in
Supply
Organizing the Supply GroupThe Chief Purchasing Offi cer (CPO)Reporting Relationship
Supply Activities and ResponsibilitiesWhat Is AcquiredSupply Chain ActivitiesType of InvolvementInvolvement in Corporate ActivitiesInfl uence of the Industry Sector on Supply
Activities
Supply TeamsLeading and Managing TeamsCross-Functional Supply TeamsOther Types of Supply Teams
Consortia
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases3–1 Iowa Elevators3–2 Lambert-Martin Automotive Systems Inc.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 44joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 44 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 45
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Separate sourcing and commodity management responsibilities?
• Use cross-functional sourcing teams to make better supply decisions?
• Move towards greater centralization?
How can we
• Fit supply’s organizational structure better with the structure of the corporate organizational structure?
• Gain the maximum benefi ts from our organizational structure?
• Structure and manage teams for effectiveness and effi ciency?
Every organization in both the public and private sector is in varying degrees dependent on
materials and services supplied by other organizations. No organization is self-suffi cient.
Even the smallest offi ce needs space, heat, light, power, communication and offi ce equip-
ment, furniture, stationery, and miscellaneous supplies to carry on its activities. Purchasing
and supply management is, therefore, one of the key business processes in every organiza-
tion. Almost every company has a separate supply function as part of its organizational
structure. One important management challenge is ensuring effective use of the resources
and capabilities of the supply organization and the supply chain or network to maximize
supply’s contribution to organizational objectives.
Managing the balance between the competitive environment, corporate strategy, and
organizational structure is an ongoing process for every company. Senior management
selects strategies designed to address competitive challenges and adopts an appropriate
corporate organizational structure to complement the company’s strategy. The struc-
ture of supply has to be congruent with this organizationwide structure. The challenge
for the chief purchasing offi cer (CPO) is to manage the supply organization to deliver
the maximum benefi ts within the predefi ned structure. For example, a chief executive
might decide that a decentralized organizational structure is appropriate in order to
allow fl exibility in responding to customer requirements. The supply organization also
would be decentralized to the various business units to fi t the corporate organizational
model.
The organizational structure of the supply function infl uences how supply executes
its responsibilities, how it works with other areas of the fi rm, and the skills and capa-
bilities needed by supply personnel. Regardless of the structure adopted, work must
be assigned to ensure the effi cient and effective delivery of goods and services to
the organization. This requires managing personnel and delegating responsibilities.
Managing the people in the supply organization to their full potential is a signifi cant
challenge.
In this chapter, three questions are addressed: (1) What are the objectives of supply?
(2) How might supply be organized to achieve these objectives effectively and effi ciently?
(3) What are the activities and responsibilities of supply management?
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 45joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 45 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
46 Purchasing and Supply Management
OBJECTIVES OF SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
The standard statement of the objectives of the supply function is that it should obtain the
right materials (meeting quality requirements), in the right quantity, for delivery at the
right time and right place, from the right source (a supplier who is reliable and will meet
its commitments in a timely fashion), with the right service (both before and after the sale),
and at the right price in the short and long term. The supply decision maker might be lik-
ened to a juggler, attempting to keep several balls in the air at the same time, for he or she
must achieve these seven rights simultaneously.
It is not acceptable to buy at the lowest price if the goods delivered are unsatisfactory
from a quality/performance standpoint, or if they arrive two weeks behind schedule. On
the other hand, the right price may be higher than normal if the item in question is an emer-
gency requirement where adherence to normal lead time would result in a higher total cost
of ownership. The right price is one aspect of lowest total cost of ownership. The supply
decision maker attempts to balance the often confl icting objectives and makes trade-offs
to obtain the optimum mix of these seven rights. Obtaining this balance with an eye to
both the short term and the long term requires supply managers to have both a tactical and
strategic perspective.
A more encompassing statement of the overall goals of supply would include the
following nine goals:
1. Improve the organization’s competitive position. As a strategic player, the activities
of supply management must be focused on contributing to overall organizational strategy,
goals, and objectives. Supply managers must identify and exploit opportunities in the sup-
ply chain to contribute to revenue enhancement, asset management, and cost reduction.
Supply can secure the lowest total cost source of supply, provide access to new technolo-
gies, and design flexible delivery arrangements, fast response times, access to high-quality
products or services, and product design and engineering assistance.
Companies that are successful in the long run must constantly look for opportuni-
ties in the supply chain to provide a superior value proposition for their customers, and
supply represents a key area for such opportunities. Strategic supply is concerned with the
long-term survival and prosperity of the organization. It focuses on bottom-line impact,
the income statement, and the balance sheet. Chapter 2 discusses the potential contribu-
tions of purchasing and supply management to the overall strategy of the organization
and specific internal supply strategies for strengthening the organization’s competitive
position.
2. Provide an uninterrupted flow of materials, supplies, and services required to oper-ate the organization. Stockouts or late deliveries of materials, components, and services
can be extremely costly in terms of lost production, lower revenues and profits, and dimin-
ished customer goodwill. For example: (1) an automobile producer cannot complete the
car without the purchased tires, (2) an airline cannot keep its planes flying on schedule
without purchased fuel, (3) a hospital cannot perform surgery without purchased surgical
tools, and (4) an office cannot be used without purchased maintenance services.
3. Keep inventory investment and loss at a minimum. One way to ensure an uninter-
rupted material flow is to hold large inventories. But inventory assets require use of
capital that cannot be invested elsewhere, and the cost of carrying inventory may be
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 46joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 46 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 47
20 to 50 percent of its value per year. For example, if supply can support operations with
an inventory investment of $10 million instead of $20 million, at an annual inventory
carrying cost of 30 percent, the $10 million reduction in inventory represents a savings of
$3 million in addition to freeing $10 million in working capital.
4. Maintain and improve quality. A certain quality level is required for each material
or service input; otherwise the end product or service will not meet expectations or will
result in higher-than-acceptable costs. The cost to correct a substandard quality input could
be huge. For example, a spring assembled into the braking system of a diesel locomotive
can cost less than $5.00. However, if the spring turns out to be defective when the locomo-
tive is in service, the replacement cost is in thousands of dollars, caused by the teardown
required to replace the spring, the lost revenue to the railroad because the locomotive is
not in service, and the possible loss of locomotive reorders. Continuous improvement in
supplier quality is directly linked to an organization’s ability to compete effectively on a
worldwide basis.
5. Find or develop best-in-class suppliers. The success of supply depends on its ability
to link supply base decisions to organization strategy and its skill in locating or develop-
ing suppliers, analyzing supplier capabilities, selecting the appropriate supplier, and then
working with that supplier to obtain continuous improvements. Only if the final selection
results in suppliers who are both responsive and responsible will the firm obtain the items
and services it needs.
6. Standardize, where possible, the items bought and the processes used to procure them. Standardization refers to the process of agreeing on a common specification or
process. Specifications and processes may be standardized across an organization, an
industry, a nation, or the world. Supply should constantly strive to standardize its capital
equipment, materials, maintenance, repair, and operating (MRO) supplies, and services
purchases wherever and whenever possible. For materials, standardization often leads
to lower risk in the marketplace, lower prices through volume purchase agreements,
and lower inventory and tracking costs while maintaining service levels. In the case of
capital equipment, standardization results in reduction in MRO inventories and reduced
costs for training staff on equipment operation and maintenance. In the case of services,
standardization leads to supply base reduction, lower operating costs, more consistent
service levels, and lower prices. Supply management process standardization also can
result in shortened cycle time, lower transaction costs, and greater opportunities to share
knowledge across functional and organizational boundaries. Because standardization
touches on multiple stakeholders, it usually requires cross-functional and sometimes cross-
organizational teamwork.
7. Purchase required items and services at lowest total cost of ownership. Purchased
goods and services in the typical organization represent the largest share of that organiza-
tion’s total costs. Consequently, the profit-leverage effect discussed in Chapter 1 can be
significant. Price is the most convenient method to compare competing proposals from
suppliers. However, supply’s responsibility is to obtain the needed goods and services at
the lowest total cost of ownership, which necessitates consideration of other factors—such
as quality levels, after-sales service, warranty costs, inventory and spare parts require-
ments, downtime, and so forth—that in the long term might have a greater cost impact on
the organization than the original purchase price.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 47joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 47 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
48 Purchasing and Supply Management
8. Achieve harmonious, productive internal relationships. Supply managers cannot
effectively accomplish their goals and objectives without effective cooperation with the
appropriate individuals in other functions. Therefore, it is useful to examine relationships
between supply and key internal business partners:
Supply and design engineering. Close to 70 percent of the value of any given
requirement is established during the fi rst few phases of the standard acquisition
process: recognition and description of need. Therefore, close cooperation
between design engineering and supply to assure proper specifi cations is essential.
The design must be driven by fi nal customer requirements for value and
satisfaction, and be designed for manufacturability and procurability. It is obvious
that such close liaison also needs proper involvement of marketing, operations,
and fi nance/accounting to recognize these opportunities and constraints. It is
during the design phase that all of these varied interests need to be appropriately
incorporated, something that is unlikely to happen unless the various functional
experts can represent their points of view well and are able to work effectively as a
team. Too frequently, the failure to include supply considerations properly at the
design stages results in inadequate product or service performance, costly delays,
rework, and end user dissatisfaction.
Supply and operations. In most organizations, close supply–operations coordination is
essential to operational excellence. In manufacturing companies especially, the total
task of integrated logistics, meeting end-customer demands on the one side and using
the supply networks on the other, while managing material and information fl ow,
equipment, people, and space effectively, represents an incredible challenge. Meeting
quality, delivery, quantity, cost, fl exibility, and continuity objectives profi tably and
competitively requires strategic as well as tactical skills of both operations and supply
managers.
Supply and marketing/sales. Since supply and marketing are mirror images of
each other, with negotiation and customer service in common, there are benefi ts
from greater integration of the two functions. Although research indicates that
supply is not typically included in marketing planning, supply and marketing often
serve on new product development teams in organizations. Supply can offer
information on current and future market conditions and negotiation expertise; and
marketing can keep supply up to date on marketing campaigns, special
promotions, and sales forecasts and involve supply in meetings with end customers
to help supply better understand customer needs. In many organizations, there is
an effort to use a strategic sourcing process for spend categories such as
advertising and media. This effort requires close cooperation of supply and
marketing.
Supply and accounting/fi nance. Supply and accounting/fi nance interact in the areas of
accounts payable, planning, and budgeting. Lack of horizontal goal alignment often
leads to behavior in one area that confl icts with behavior in the other area. For
example, fi nance/accounting may adopt a payment policy that is at odds with the
payment terms of the contract. From the fi nance perspective, holding onto cash as long
as possible is a good way to contribute to the organization’s fi nancial goals. From the
supply perspective, building sound, mutually benefi cial relationships with key
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 48joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 48 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 49
suppliers contributes to fi nancial performance. Supply managers often argue that
accounting focuses too much on short-term gains from holding cash rather than the
longer-term benefi ts of a strong buyer–supplier relationship that is infl uenced by
paying according to contractual payment terms. Improved communication between
supply and accounting/fi nance and greater goal congruence can help to alleviate some
of the problems. Supply can help fi nance by providing funds fl ow forecasts, focusing
on inventory minimization, and providing market information.
9. Accomplish supply objectives at the lowest possible operating costs. It takes
resources to operate supply: salaries, communications expense, supplies, travel costs,
computer costs, and accompanying overhead. The objectives of supply should be
achieved as efficiently and economically as possible. Process inefficiencies repre-
sent waste and lead to excessive operating costs and unnecessarily high total cost of
ownership. Supply managers should be continually alert to improvements possible in
purchasing and supply processes, methods, procedures, and techniques. For example,
opportunities to reduce transaction costs include e-procurement systems that auto-
mate the process from requisition to payment and purchasing cards and e-catalogs for
small-value purchases. Companies with efficient supply processes can create competi-
tive advantage through reduced costs, improved flexibility, faster time to market, and
greater compliance, while allowing supply personnel to concentrate on value-added
activities.
The objectives of supply must ultimately contribute to the attainment of short- and long-
term organizational strategy, goals, and objectives. The process and function can be or-
ganized in a number of different ways to maximize supply’s contribution effectively and
effi ciently.
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURES FOR SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
Ultimately the supply organization structure must be aligned with the corporate structure
and strategy. In addition, organizational size and the need for specialization with supply
also need to be taken into account.
Small and Medium-Sized OrganizationsIn practice it has been proven that assigning the supply function to supply professionals,
properly trained and charged with the appropriate responsibilities and authorities, contrib-
utes more effi ciently and effectively to organizational goals and strategies than assigning
supply responsibilities to those for whom supply is a secondary responsibility. Never-
theless, in single business unit organizations, particularly small enterprises, it is not un-
usual to see supply responsibilities shared by a variety of individuals who have no supply
expertise and purchase their own requirements from local retailers or wholesalers. As the
size of the business unit increases, the idea of assigning a professional the responsibility of
supply emerges and a separate function is created.
The size and activities of the supply function in a single business unit organization will
depend on a number of factors, such as the size of the company and the nature of its busi-
ness. Figure 3–1 provides an example of a supply organization in a typical medium-sized,
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 49joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 49 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
50 Purchasing and Supply Management
single business unit enterprise. Obviously in small companies where the supply staff con-
sists of only one or two individuals, the staff is expected to be fl exible in terms of their
capabilities and skills. Specialization will occur as the organization gets larger and the
company can afford to hire additional supply personnel.
Large OrganizationsIn large companies the centralization–decentralization issue is of key importance for the
supply structure. The overall corporate structure sets the framework for the supply struc-
ture. Structural options can be viewed as a continuum ranging from centralized at one
extreme to decentralized at the other. Centralization refers to where spending decisions
are made, not where the purchasing and supply staff are located geographically. Therefore,
the degree of centralization is refl ected by the amount of spend managed or controlled by
corporate supply. Three common organizational models are:
1. Centralized, where the authority and responsibility for most supply-related functions
are assigned to a central organization.
2. Hybrid, where authority and responsibility are shared between a central supply orga-
nization and business units, divisions, or operating plants. Hybrid structures may lean
more heavily toward centralized or decentralized depending on how decision-making
authority is divided. One type of hybrid supply structure is a “center-led” organization
in which strategic direction is centralized and execution is decentralized.
3. Decentralized, where the authority and responsibility for supply-related functions are
dispersed throughout the organization.
CAPS Research conducts a wide range of benchmarking reports that can be accessed
through their website. The benchmark reports include a breakdown of supply staff at the
operational and strategic levels in the participating organizations.
FIGURE 3–1Example of a Typical Supply Organization in a Single-Location, Medium-Sized Company
Manager
Administration
and Processes
Materials
Manager
Stores/
Warehouse
Manager
Receiving
Inspection
Manager
Manager
Transportation
Commodity
Manager
Commodity
Manager
Buyer
Buyer
Buyer Manager
e-Purchasing
Manager
p-cards
Manager
Purchasing
Research
Buyer
Director of
Supply
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 50joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 50 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 51
Centralized and Decentralized Supply StructuresThere are advantages and disadvantages to centralization and to decentralization. Table 3–1
summarizes the advantages and disadvantages of a centralized supply structure and
Table 3–2 summarizes the advantages and disadvantages of a decentralized supply structure.1
Hybrid Supply StructureIn an organization with multiple business units, divisions or business units often sell differ-
ent products or services requiring a different mix of purchased items. Often the division or
business unit is operated as a profi t center where the division manager is given total respon-
sibility for running the division, acts as president of an independent fi rm, and is judged by
profi ts made by the division. Since purchases are frequently the largest single controllable
cost of running most businesses and have a direct effect on its effi ciency and competitive
position, the profi t-center manager may insist on having direct authority over supply. This
has led fi rms to adopt decentralized–centralized supply, or a hybrid organizational struc-
ture, in which the supply function is partially centralized at the corporate or head offi ce and
partially decentralized to the business units.
Often the corporate supply organization works with the business unit supply departments
in those tasks that are more effectively handled on a corporate basis: (1) establishment
TABLE 3–1Potential Advantages and Disadvantages of Centralization
Advantages Disadvantages
• Strategic focus • Lack of business unit focus• Greater buying specialization • Narrow specialization and job boredom • Cost of central unit highly visible• Ability to pay for talent • Corporate staff appears excessive• Consolidation of requirements—clout • Tendency to minimize legitimate differences in requirements• Coordination and control of policies • Lack of recognition of unique business and procedures unit needs• Effective planning and research • Focus on corporate requirements, not on business unit strategic requirements • Most knowledge sharing one- way• Common suppliers • Even common suppliers behave differently in geographic and market segments• Proximity to major organizational • Distance from users decision makers• Critical mass • Tendency to create organizational silos• Firm brand recognition and stature • Customer segments require adaptability to unique situations• Reporting line—power • Top management not able to spend time on suppliers• Cost of purchasing low • High visibility of purchasing operating costs
1 M. R. Leenders and P. F. Johnson, Major Structural Changes in Supply Organizations ( Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2000).
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 51joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 51 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
52 Purchasing and Supply Management
of policies, procedures, controls, and systems; (2) recruiting and training of personnel;
(3) coordination of the purchase of common-use items in which more “clout” is needed;
(4) auditing of supply performance; and (5) development of corporatewide supply strate-
gies. Therefore, hybrid organizational structures attempt to capture the benefi ts of both
centralized and decentralized structures by creating an organizational structure that is nei-
ther completely centralized nor decentralized. (See Figure 3–2.)
Structure affects processes, procedures, systems, and relationships. Whether supply
is centralized, decentralized, or a hybrid, supply personnel must focus on maximizing
the advantages of the structure and minimizing the disadvantages. Supply managers can
develop and implement strategies to overcome the obstacles and fully exploit the opportu-
nities of organizational and supply structure.
Specialization within the Supply FunctionIf the supply organization is to contribute well to organizational goals and objectives, it
needs to be staffed by professionals with clearly defi ned responsibilities. Specialization
within the supply department allows staff to develop expertise in particular areas and may
require the creation of specialized groups within the supply organizational structure. Most
large supply organizations consist of four general areas of specialization: sourcing and
commodity management, materials management, administration, and supply research.
TABLE 3–2Potential Advantages and Disadvantages of Decentralization
Advantages Disadvantages
• Easier coordination/communication • More difficult to communicate among with operating department business units• Speed of response • Encourages users not to plan ahead • Operational versus strategic focus• Effective use of local sources • Too much focus on local sources—ignores
better supply opportunities • No critical mass in organization for
visibility/effectiveness—“whole person syndrome”
• Lacks clout• Business unit autonomy • Suboptimization • Business unit preferences not congruent
with corporate preferences • Small differences get magnifi ed• Reporting line simplicity • Reporting at low level in organization• Undivided authority and responsibility • Limits functional advancement
opportunities• Suits purchasing personnel preference • Ignores larger organization considerations• Broad job defi nition • Limited expertise for requirements• Geographical, cultural, political, • Lack of standardization
environmental, social, language,currency appropriateness
• Hide the cost of supply • Cost of supply relatively high
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 52joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 52 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 53
Sourcing and Commodity ManagementThese personnel develop commodity strategies, identify potential suppliers, analyze
supplier capabilities, select suppliers, and determine prices, terms, and conditions of
supplier agreements; they create contracts and purchase orders. This activity is normally
further specialized by type of commodity to be purchased, such as raw materials (which
may be further specialized); fuels; capital equipment; offi ce equipment and supplies;
and MRO. Figure 3–3 presents a job description for a commodity specialist at Deere &
Company.
A variation of commodity management is project buying, in which the specialization of
buying and negotiation is based on specifi c end products or projects, requiring the buyer to
be intimately familiar with all aspects of the project from beginning to end. Project buying
might be used in the supply organization of a large general contractor, where the purchas-
ing for each job is part of a self-contained, temporary organization. At the completion
of the project, the buyer then would be reassigned to another project. The United States
Defense Acquisition University trains special project managers who are responsible for the
proper acquisition and development of new military equipment initiatives. Such projects
may last as long as 20 years.
Materials ManagementThis group manages the contract after it is signed, directs the fl ow of materials and services
from the supplier, and keeps track of the supplier’s delivery and quality commitments
to avoid any disruptive surprises. If problems develop, the materials management group
pressures and assists the supplier to resolve them. Materials management activities are fre-
quently handled at the local plant or offi ce level and involve regular communication with
suppliers concerning requirements, such as order quantities and delivery dates. Figure 3–4
presents a job description for a supply management planner.
AdministrationThis group handles the physical preparation and routing of the formal purchase documents,
manages the department budget, keeps the necessary data required to operate the depart-
ment, and prepares reports needed by top management and supply. These personnel will
likely manage operation of information systems, including e-procurement systems, B2B
e-commerce, and electronic data interchange (EDI).
FIGURE 3–2Potential Advantages of the Hybrid Structure
Centralized Decentralized
Disadvantages DisadvantagesAdvantages Advantages
Hybrid
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 53joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 53 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
54 Purchasing and Supply Management
Supply ResearchSupply researchers work on special projects relating to the collection, classifi cation, and
analysis of data needed to make better purchasing decisions. Activities include studies on
use of alternate materials, long-range demand, price and supply forecasts, and analysis of
what it should cost an effi cient supplier to produce and deliver a product or service.
This group is also responsible for performing benchmarking studies. Johnson Controls,
a global automotive supplier, uses its “materials best business practice” process to bench-
mark purchases at the commodity level. Cross-functional teams, made up of staff from sup-
ply, engineering, and fi nance, evaluate commodities and work with suppliers to eliminate
or reduce gaps in performance requirements.2
FIGURE 3–3Commodity Specialist Job Description for Deere & Company
Job Title: Commodity SpecialistDepartment: Supply ManagementJob Function: Locate sources for and procure materials, products, supplies or services
to support the assigned commodity requirements of the enterprise. Manage the relationships with suppliers.
Primary Duties:
1. Manage source selection and development through a team process including the evaluation of cost, quality, and manufacturing systems.
2. Develop and manage internal and external supplier/customer relationships, including strategic alliances where appropriate.
3. Lead and/or participate on simultaneous engineering teams; facilitate the integration of suppliers into the product delivery process (PDP).
4. Evaluate the cost-effectiveness of designs, procure tooling, and qualify processes to assure the product meets specifi cations.
5. Make recommendations for design change and/or infl uence design through personal or supplier involvement.
6. Develop and execute supply management strategies to manage cost, quality, and continuous improvement.
7. Develop material control and logistics objectives.8. Act as a primary communications link between tactical and strategic purchasing
functions and business units; participate in team activities.
2 M. Siegfried, “Fundamental Best-In-Class Values,”Inside Supply Management 19, no. 7, (2008) p. 30.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 54joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 54 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 55
Structure for Direct and Indirect Spend Direct spend includes any goods that go into the end product or service; indirect spend is
comprised of the goods and services that are needed to run the organization. Indirect spend
includes purchases such as professional services, utilities, travel, employee benefi ts, and
offi ce supplies. In many organizations, the locus of control over direct spend is in a highly
centralized supply group. This makes sense because anything that ultimately touches the
fi nal customer is worthy of expertise.
Indirect spend, on the other hand, is often outside the loop of a structured sourcing pro-
cess and supply authority and responsibility is often left in the hands of the internal user. For
FIGURE 3–4Supply Management Planner Job Description for Deere & Company
Job Title: Supply Management PlannerDepartment: Supply ManagementJob Function: To expedite, schedule, and/or analyze requirements for purchased
materials in accordance with established requirements and inventory control criteria. May interact with suppliers to establish procedural agreements, obtain delivery commitments, and resolve quality problems.
Primary Duties:
1. Manages specifi c supplier performance and feedback along with managing day- to- day business plan and relationships with supplier.
2. Plans and/or executes inventory goals by product/supplier and plans/develops delivery system to meet material control objectives (i.e., JIT delivery, P.O.U.D., EDI).
3. Schedules material based on requirements and expedites deliveries that are delinquent or expected to be delinquent. Tracks and resolves problems with inbound shipments.
4. Interprets systems output to determine items requiring follow- up to suppliers on materials ordered to assure on- time delivery.
5. Is involved with the day- to- day problem resolution/corrective action with suppliers: to scrap, return, reclaim, or replace rejected material. Is responsible for bringing products within specifi cations.
6. Acts as the primary communications link between tactical and strategic purchasing functions and business unit; participates in supply management team activities.
7. Costs and implements current part revisions, including tooling, as part of the decision processing activity. Also reads and reacts to engineering decisions.
8. Conducts price/economic order quantity analysis and compares multiple quotes, including piece price, freight, duty, performance systems, and supplier rating. Also investigates invoice price errors.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 55joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 55 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
56 Purchasing and Supply Management
example, a marketing manager needing to hire temporary labor would conduct the purchas-
ing process in his or her own way. This highly decentralized approach leads to a fragmented
spend for temporary labor, including multiple suppliers, multiple rates, and varying contract
terms and conditions. This is partly due to the belief that these types of purchases require a
level of knowledge and expertise not found in a typical supply department.
The increasing focus on strategic cost management has led many senior managers to
turn their attention to indirect spend to realize cost savings, reductions, or avoidances.
To better manage indirect spend, some organizations will pull indirect spend categories
into the purchasing process. Others expect supply managers to convince internal users
that there is value in following a structured sourcing process. In some cases, supply pro-
vides analysis and recommendations, but the budget owner makes the purchasing decision.
Cross-functional teams consisting of internal users (often across business units) and buyers
or commodity managers may be given responsibility for the category. Sourcing, evaluating,
and selecting suppliers for indirect spend will be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 12.
Any purchase dollars that are not managed through a structured sourcing process may
represent a target for cost savings, reduction, or avoidance.
Managing Organizational Change in SupplyFirms frequently make major changes to their supply organizational structure. A CAPS
Research focus study was conducted, in part, to answer two questions: (1) Why are there so
many structural changes in supply organizations at large companies? (2) If the hybrid orga-
nizational structure is theoretically so attractive, then why do so many large fi rms not use
this structure and/or move out of it?3 First, the researchers found that organizational struc-
ture change was the result of a change in the overall corporate organizational structure. In
none of the situations did the chief purchasing offi cer (CPO) have free choice to select the
supply organizational structure that he or she deemed appropriate for the circumstances.
Rather, the supply organizational structure was forced to be congruent with the overall
corporate structure. The challenge for supply executives, therefore, was to maximize the
benefi ts of the organizational structure while minimizing the disadvantages.
Secondly, there are a number of implementation issues to consider when making a
major organizational structure change in supply. Major changes affect the lives of many
people and create an atmosphere of apprehension among the staff. Implementing change
places signifi cant pressures on the CPO, who not only has to worry about managing the
day-to-day affairs of the supply department, but also has to successfully implement the
organizational change. The challenges associated with these issues frequently contribute to
the need to seek assistance from consultants when implementing a major structural change.
The Lambert-Martin Automotive Systems Inc. case at the end of this chapter describes
a large automotive parts company with a decentralized supply function. The recent ap-
pointment of a new CEO has resulted in questions being asked about whether the company
should rethink its organizational structure and centralize some supply activities.
Changes toward CentralizationTwo major concerns facing organizations when they move the supply function towards
greater centralization are sources of supply talent and the availability of information related
to the total corporate spend. During the transition, the source of supply talent at all levels
3 Leenders and Johnson, Major Structural Changes in Supply Organizations.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 56joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 56 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 57
of the supply function is a signifi cant challenge. Experienced senior corporate-level supply
personnel may not exist in-house. How and where to develop such organizational talent rep-
resented an important implementation issue. Some fi rms place a greater priority on CPO
credibility within the organization, as opposed to previous supply experience. Others identify
new CPOs with previous supply experience to handle the change process. At the middle and
junior levels, additional staff with specialized skills in areas such as contracting is required.
Quite often, the existing supply talent in the decentralized organization is perceived to lack
the required training or experience needed in the new centralized environment.
Changes toward DecentralizationThe CAPS Research focus study identifi ed one implementation issue unique to the sites
in the study moving toward decentralization: how to dismantle the centralized supply unit
effectively. For example, Ontario Hydro created a shared services function that was respon-
sible for negotiating corporatewide agreements and establishing and maintaining corporate
purchasing policies, while the business units were responsible for materials management
activities. The approach taken by Hoechst was to create a separate legal entity, Hoechst
Procurement International, which would also offer purchasing services to other companies
on a fee-for-service basis. The key objective in both situations was to preserve at least some
of the organization’s core supply capabilities and talent, while adapting to the new struc-
tural requirements of the company.
ORGANIZING THE SUPPLY GROUP
Once the corporate organizational structure is set, no matter what organizational design
is chosen, delegation takes place within it. Whether the organization structure is based on
functions, products, or business processes is immaterial; what really matters is that work
must be assigned and executed in accordance with strategic plans and organizational goals.
It follows logically that organizational planning and delegation are important segments of
the integration of strategic goals and organizational designs.
The following sections describe the key aspects of supply organizational design, in-
cluding the role of the chief purchasing offi cer, supply’s status in the organization, and its
reporting relationship and internal relationships. Even though the focus is on large supply
organizations, many of the comments are also relevant for smaller supply organizations.
The Chief Purchasing Offi cer (CPO)The chief purchasing offi cer (CPO) or chief supply offi cer (CSO) is defi ned as the “most
senior” or “top level” executive in a “fi rm’s corporate (executive level) offi ce or major
division, such as a strategic business unit (SBU), who has formal authority and responsi-
bility to manage his or her fi rm’s (or SBU’s) purchasing, buying or sourcing functions for
the procurement of goods and services from external suppliers.”4 The CPO’s responsibili-
ties may be divided and apportioned among managers and departments, but the functional
responsibility and authority of the CPO should be defi nitely recognized. Moreover, func-
tionalization implies that all the responsibilities reasonably involved in the supply function
4 T. E. Hendrick and J. Ni, Chief Purchasing Offi cers’ Mobility, Compensation Benchmarks, and Demo-graphics: A Study of Fortune 500 Firms (Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2007).
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 57joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 57 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
58 Purchasing and Supply Management
must be given to the CPO, covering the relevant supply network links as well as the full
range of organizational needs. The essential principle is that there are certain universally
recognized duties pertinent to this function and that these duties should be placed in a sepa-
rate group equal in status with the other major functions of the organization.
Changes in the supply management fi eld have affected everything from what the function
is called to the titles of the people performing the tasks to the tasks that are performed. There
is no common title for the individual who holds the top supply position in a large organization
in North America. Depending on the role of supply in the organization, the reporting line, and
where it is placed on the organization chart, the title may be chief purchasing offi cer, vice
president, director, or manager. Attached to that may be purchasing, procurement, supply
management, sourcing, strategic sourcing, logistics, or supply chain management. It is quite
common to see CPO titles such as vice president, strategic sourcing and supply; vice presi-
dent, purchasing; vice president, supply chain management; or director, global procurement.
The titles in the cases used in this text provide a good range of titles in current use.
Profi le of the CPOThe following profi le of the average CPO emerged from a recent CAPS Research focus
study.5 The average CPO is a well-educated 51-year-old who has been at his or her orga-
nization for 14 years and CPO for 4.6 years, compared to 5.9 years in 1995. While most
CPOs have previous experience in supply, approximately 80 percent of the CPOs in the
study had worked in at least one other function. Approximately 70 percent of CPOs had the
title of vice president and the title most likely included the word procurement, purchasing, supply chain, or supply management in it, such as vice president, global procurement or
vice president of supply chain management.
Typically there are one to two levels between the CPO and the CEO. The most com-
mon CPO reporting lines were senior vice president/group VP (22 percent), executive vice
president (17 percent), vice president of fi nance/CFO (17 percent), and president/CEO
(13 percent). Seventy-seven percent of the CPOs in the CAPS study reported to one of
the top fi ve executive position categories (president/CEO, COO, executive vice president,
senior vice president/group vice president, and CFO/vice president of fi nance).
The CPO may have overall management responsibility for nontraditional purchases
such as corporate travel, food services, real estate, IT hardware and software, printing,
and benefi ts. Additionally, the CPO might have responsibility for logistics (which includes
inbound and outbound transportation, fl eet management, warehousing, materials handling,
order fulfi llment, inventory management, supply/demand planning, and management of
third-party logistics providers), quality, accounts payable, document/contract manage-
ment, leadership of the supply process, materials, distribution, and facility management.
CPO TrendsSeveral trends have emerged in the past decade regarding the profi le and role of the CPO:6
• Education levels are increasing. Almost all CPOs hold a bachelor’s degree; about half,
a graduate degree, typically an MBA.
5 P. F. Johnson and M. R. Leenders, Supply’s Organizational Roles and Responsibilities (Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, May 2012).6 P. F. Johnson, and M. R. Leenders, Supply Leadership Changes ( Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2007).
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 58joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 58 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 59
• Reporting lines are changing. CPOs tend to report higher in the organization than they
did in the 1980s and 1990s.
• CPOs are increasingly being hired from outside the organization rather than promoted from
within. CPO tenure with their organization declined to 14 years in 2011, from 18 years in
1995, and more than one-third of CPOs are hired into the position from another fi rm.
• CPOs are increasingly being hired from functional areas other than supply. This was the
case in approximately 40 percent of the CPOs in the CAPS Research study.
• When a new CPO replaces a current CPO, the current CPO is promoted or leaves the
company for a similar position in another fi rm.
• CPO reporting lines change every 2.5 years on average, which means that the typical
CPO will have at least two different bosses during his or her tenure in the role.
• The CPO role is still new in many organizations.
Reporting RelationshipThe executive to whom the CPO reports gives a good indication of the status of supply and
the degree to which it is emphasized within the organization. If the chief purchasing offi cer
has the title of vice president and reports to the CEO, this indicates that supply has been
recognized as a top management function. Reporting to the CEO, however, is not essential.
CEOs in large organizations have a broad portfolio of responsibilities, ranging from share-
holder relations to corporate strategy. Reporting to one of the other top fi ve senior execu-
tives (executive vice president, senior vice president/group vice president, and CFO/vice
president of fi nance) in the fi rm can provide supply the organizational clout and exposure
needed to play a signifi cant role. These individuals may have more time and interest in the
supply chain issues facing the organization. If supply reports to an executive too low in the
organization, the less infl uence supply is likely to have on corporate strategy.
When supply is not given the same status as other functions, it must be placed under
another senior functional executive. In many cases, supply reports to the chief fi nancial
offi cer because of the immediate impact of supply decisions on cash fl ows, the size of the
annual spend, and the amount of money tied up in inventory. Organizational focus on stra-
tegic cost management also supports the decision to place supply under fi nance. In orga-
nizations where a high percentage of annual spend is for production requirements, supply
often reports to the top manufacturing executive. In a shared services model, supply along
with legal, accounting, human resources, and other functions might report to an administra-
tive vice president. In a heavily engineering-oriented fi rm, the reporting relationship might
be to the chief of engineering to get closer communication and coordination on product
specifi cation and quality control.
Factors that infl uence the level at which the supply function is placed in the organiza-
tional structure cover a broad spectrum. Among the major ones are:
1. The amount of purchased material and outside services costs as a percentage of either
total costs or total income of the organization. A high ratio emphasizes the importance
of effective performance of the supply function.
2. The nature of the products or services acquired. The acquisition of complex compo-
nents or extensive use of subcontracting represents a difficult supply problem.
3. The extent to which supply and suppliers can provide competitive advantage.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 59joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 59 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
60 Purchasing and Supply Management
The important consideration in determining to whom supply should report relates to
where it will be most effective in realizing its contribution to the organization’s objectives.
Supply should report at a level high enough in the organization so that the key supply as-
pects of strategic managerial decisions will receive proper consideration.
SUPPLY ACTIVITIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Supply management can be described as a series of activities that must be managed
effectively for the organization to deliver best value to the fi nal customer. Roles and re-
sponsibilities of supply fall into four general categories: (1) what is acquired, (2) supply
chain activities, (3) type of involvement in categories 1 and 2, and (4) involvement in
corporate activities.7
What Is AcquiredThe items acquired by the supply group vary from organization to organization and items
are added or deleted depending on circumstances in the buying organization. The acquisi-
tion segments include raw materials, standard and special direct purchases, MRO, capital,
services, and resale. Nontraditional purchases are spend categories that have typically been
managed outside of the purchasing and supply management process. In some organiza-
tions, purchasing activities are limited to production-related materials and services, leaving
responsibility for nonproduction or indirect materials and services in the hands of users.
The amount of annual spend that falls outside the management or control of supply
ranges from a low of about 2 percent to a high of about 40 percent. This often includes
large amounts for capital equipment, utilities, insurance, computers and software, travel,
real estate, and construction services. Senior management in many organizations has rec-
ognized the signifi cant opportunities from applying the skills of their supply group and the
benefi ts of a structured sourcing process in the acquisition of nontraditional materials and
services.
The Iowa Elevators case demonstrates the opportunities for supply to capture cost re-
ductions in a large service organization. Exhibit 2 in the case provides a list of spend
categories that include direct (e.g., farm supplies) and indirect (e.g., travel) purchases.
Supply Chain ActivitiesSupply has assumed greater responsibilities in a wide range of areas, including those not
seen as traditional, as companies strive to leverage profi t opportunities and create competi-
tive advantage through their supply practices. Today’s supply management organization
has more responsibilities than the traditional “buying” activities once associated with the
function. The activities handled by the supply function vary from fi rm to fi rm, even within
the same industry. However, regardless of company size, there are a number of activities
common to most supply organizations (see Table 3–3).
The addition or deletion of activities in any organization can be categorized as internally
or externally focused. Internally focused activities include accounts payable, centralized
coordination of purchasing, cost management, legal, materials management and logistics,
7 M. R. Leenders and P. F. Johnson, Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities ( Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, 2002).
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 60joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 60 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 61
production planning, quality, and supply budget and fi nancial management. Externally focused
activities may have either a supplier focus or a customer focus. Supplier-focused activities
include inbound logistics, supplier development, raw material procurement for suppliers,
supplier evaluation and communication, e-procurement, and outsourcing or subcontracting.
Customer-focused activities include outbound logistics, involvement with new business
development and new product development, and programs and customer bid support.
Area of Responsibility Activities
Purchasing/buying • Creating contracts and supply agreements for materials, services, and capital items
• Managing key purchasing processes related tosupplier selection, supplier evaluation, negotiation, and contract management
Purchasing research • Identifying better techniques and approaches tosupply management, including benchmarking processes and systems
• Identifying medium- and long- term changes in markets and developing appropriate commodity strategies to meet future needs
• Identifying supply chain trends and opportunitiesfor better materials and services
Inventory control • Managing inventories and expediting material delivery • Establishing and monitoring vendor-managed
inventory systemsTransportation • Managing inbound and outbound transportation
services, including carrier selectionEnvironmental and • Managing supply chain–related activities to assure investment recovery/disposal compliance with legal and regulatory requirements
and with company environmental policies • Managing disposal of surplus materials and
equipmentForecasting and planning • Planning production and forecasting short-,
medium-, and long- term requirementsOutsourcing and • Evaluating potential suppliers and negotiating subcontracting contracts • Supporting the transition from internal production
to external supply and vice versaNonproduction/nontraditional • Managing cost- effective delivery of nonproductionpurchases and nontraditional purchases, such as offi ce
supplies, security services, janitorial services, advertising, and insurance
Supply chain management • Implementing and managing key supplierrelationships and supplier partnerships, including supplier development and participation on cross- functional and cross- organizational teams
• Developing strategies that use the supply network to provide value to end customers and contribute to organizational goals
TABLE 3–3Supply Activities
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 61joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 61 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
62 Purchasing and Supply Management
Type of InvolvementSupply can have no involvement, documentary, professional, or meaningful involvement
in what is acquired and in supply chain activities. No involvement means supply is ex-
cluded completely. Documentary involvement requires the supply function to act as a re-
corder, a sender of purchase orders, or a receiver of bids, but important supply decisions
are made outside supply. Professional involvement implies that supply professionals have
the opportunity to exercise their expertise in important acquisition process stages. Mean-
ingful involvement means that parties outside the supply group are willing and able to take
supply considerations into account in managing their own areas of responsibility. They
routinely and actively request input and assistance from supply personnel and, in turn, also
are involved in supply decisions traditionally considered the prerogative of supply. One
measure of meaningful involvement is the extent to which supply is expected to take part
in major corporate activities.
Involvement in Corporate ActivitiesMajor strategic corporate initiatives include mergers and acquisitions, new facility plan-
ning, new product development, outsourcing, revenue enhancement, technology planning,
corporate e-commerce initiative, and corporate cost reduction initiative.
Infl uence of the Industry Sector on Supply ActivitiesThe industry sector infl uences supply responsibilities. Firms that manufacture discrete
goods such as cars, consumer electronics, apparel, and furniture face a signifi cant number
of dynamic, product-related pressures that affect the supply function and that are less likely
to occur in commodity-oriented process industries. These pressures include changing con-
sumer preferences, product innovation, and relatively short product life cycles.
Purchased materials and services also represent a high percentage of the cost of sales
for fi rms in discrete goods industries. For example, purchased materials and services can
represent 60 to 80 percent of the average cost of an automobile. Consequently, fi rms in
discrete goods industries are likely to have supply departments that play a key role in each
step in the materials cycle, from product design to production.
The role of supply in process industry fi rms, such as oil and gas, chemicals, glass, and
steel industries, is typically different compared to fi rms in discrete goods industries. Many
process industry fi rms have two supply organizations: a specialized supply group, such
as a commodity trading department, that frequently handles purchasing for important raw
materials and a purchasing group responsible for the acquisition of materials, supplies,
and services that support the operation of facilities. For example, it is common practice for
crude oil acquisition in most large integrated oil companies to be handled by a commodity
trading group, while other purchases are handled by the supply organization. As a result,
although the cost of purchased materials and services might represent a substantial portion
of the total cost of sales, the supply function for fi rms within processing industries is fre-
quently excluded from the acquisition of the single most important raw material.
In the public not-for-profi t sector and service sectors, most purchases are for end use
within the organization itself, with the exception of purchases for resale, such as in distri-
bution and retail. In fast-growing organizations, capital purchases may represent a large
percentage of total acquisition expenditures.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 62joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 62 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 63
SUPPLY TEAMS
Corporate organization structures are leaner, fl atter, more adaptive, and more fl exible than
in the past. Rigid functional structures have been replaced by a greater dependence on
cross-functional teams that overlay the functional organization to push decisions lower in
the organizational hierarchy. Teams bring together a number of people, often from differ-
ent functional areas, to work on a common task. It is believed that teams provide superior
results compared to individual efforts as a result of the range of skills, knowledge, and
capabilities of team members. They also promote cross-functional cooperation and com-
munication and may facilitate consensus building in the organization.
Teams are used by a number of functions for a variety of purposes, such as improvements
in quality, cost, or delivery; product development; process engineering; and technology man-
agement. They can be project oriented or ongoing. Project teams are brought together for a
limited time to achieve a specifi c goal or outcome, such as completion of a capital project
or an e-commerce initiative. Ongoing teams continue indefi nitely, such as a commodity-
sourcing team that manages the purchasing process and supplier relationships.
Leading and Managing TeamsChanging to a team-based workplace requires a signifi cant level of commitment and train-
ing of management and individual team members. Critical success factors include:
• Supportive organizational culture, structure, and systems.
• A common compelling purpose, measurable goals, and feedback for individuals and the
team.
• Organized for customer satisfaction rather than individual functional success.
• All functional areas involved in up-front planning, shared leadership roles, and role
fl exibility.
• The right people (right qualifi cations), in the right place (on a team that needed their
skills), at the right time (when those skills were needed).
• A common, agreed-upon work approach and investment in a high level of communication.
• Dedication to performance and implementation with decisions delegated to the appro-
priate level.
• Integration of all relevant functional areas and various teams throughout the project life cycle.
Senior management often tries to combine the fl exibility of decentralized supply man-
agement and the buying power and information sharing of centralized supply through the
use of teams. Various types of purchasing and supply management teams may be used,
including cross-functional teams, teams with suppliers, teams with customers, teams with
both suppliers and customers, supplier councils (key suppliers), purchasing councils (pur-
chasing personnel only), commodity management teams (purchasing personnel only), and
consortia (pool buying with other fi rms).
Cross-Functional Supply TeamsCross-functional teams consist of personnel from multiple functions focused on a supply-
related task. It is generally believed that high-performing, cross-functional teams will get
better results on the task, with greater benefi t to the organization as a whole, at lower
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 63joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 63 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
64 Purchasing and Supply Management
costs, in less time, with greater stakeholder buy-in. Effective cross-functional teams save
time by allowing a simultaneous, rather than a sequential, approach. For example, if key
stakeholder groups are involved in the development of a new process from concept through
design, development, and rollout, the process may be better to start with, more widely ac-
cepted, and adopted quickly. The cycle time may be less than the nonteam approach but
more of the work is concentrated at the beginning of the process.
Three important cross-functional supply teams are sourcing, new product development,
and commodity management.
Sourcing TeamsA cross-functional sourcing team includes supply and representatives from other relevant
functional areas. The team can focus on a wide range of projects including developing
cost-reduction strategies; developing local, business unit, or organizationwide sourcing
strategies; evaluating and selecting suppliers; performing value analysis; analyzing spend;
and identifying consolidation opportunities.
For example, to foster internal strategic business alignment, the CPO at General Mills
created a position called director of sourcing operations (DSO). The prime focus of the
DSO was to work with cross-functional business unit teams comprised of marketing,
R&D, manufacturing, distribution, and accounting on important strategic initiatives. The
DSO brought a sourcing perspective and provided a leadership role and alignment between
sourcing strategies and business unit strategies. Specifi c initiatives were proposed as part
of the annual business plan and DSO performance was evaluated considering team results.8
New Product/Service Development TeamsEffective new product or service development processes can improve an organization’s
competitive position. Cross-functional teams can shorten development cycle times, im-
prove quality, and reduce development costs by operating concurrently rather than sequen-
tially. Rather than each functional area performing its task and passing the project off to the
next functional area, the key functional groups—usually design, engineering, manufactur-
ing, quality assurance, purchasing, and marketing—work on the new product development
simultaneously. Because a large percentage of a product’s cost is purchased materials,
early supplier involvement is often needed. When surveyed, many supply managers report
greater involvement in new product/service design and development.
Commodity Management TeamsCommodity management teams are formed when expenditures are high and the commod-
ity is complex and important to success. These are generally permanent teams that provide
increased expertise, more cross-functional coordination and communication, better control
over standardization programs, and increased communication with suppliers. They develop
and implement commodity strategies aimed at achieving the lowest total cost of ownership.
They engage in a number of activities, including supply base reduction, consolidation of
requirements, supplier quality certifi cation, management of deliveries and lead times, cost
savings projects, and management of supplier relationships.
The Delphi Corporation case in Chapter 13 describes how the company used approxi-
mately 30 commodity teams, across four categories—chemical, electrical, metallic, and
technological—to manage approximately 80 percent of its spend.
8 Johnson and Leenders, Supply Leadership Changes, p. 59.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 64joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 64 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 65
Other Types of Supply TeamsIn addition to the three common forms of cross-functional teams, there are at least six
additional approaches to supply teams: supplier participation, customer participation, co-
location of supply, co-location of suppliers, supplier councils, and supply councils.
Teams with Supplier ParticipationSupplier participation in cross-functional sourcing teams depends on the nature of the
assignment. For example, it makes sense to include suppliers in teams assigned to develop
supplier capabilities or improve supplier responsiveness, but not on teams assigned to eval-
uate and select new suppliers.
Involving suppliers at the product design stage can produce substantial benefi ts and is
common in discrete goods manufacturing industries, such as automotive and consumer
electronics. The development of the Boeing 777 commercial aircraft made extensive use
of supplier participation on cross-functional teams, enabling successful design and pro-
duction in record time. Automotive manufacturers periodically give suppliers primary re-
sponsibility for designing major components, such as seating systems. The Ford Motor
Company case in Chapter 2 provides an example of a company that engages suppliers early
in the product-development process to identify opportunities for cost and quality improve-
ments and supplier innovation.
Intellectual property issues and confi dentiality are perhaps the biggest obstacles to sup-
plier participation, particularly when new product design is involved. Some fi rms ask sup-
pliers to sign confi dentiality agreements to minimize the potential effect of this obstacle on
the team’s effectiveness.
Teams with Customer ParticipationIn an effort to be truly customer driven, some organizations include end customers on
their teams. For example, when a commercial airframe maker designs a new passenger
aircraft, it makes sense to have potential airline customers participate in the design team.
They know best the characteristics a new aircraft must have from the airline perspective,
given its anticipated passenger loads, route structures, maintenance plans, and passenger
service strategies. If supply is also included in teams with end customers, there is a greater
opportunity to deliver the greatest value in the shortest cycle time.
Co-location of Supply with Internal CustomersLocating buyers with internal customers (e.g., engineering or operations) can help to break
down barriers between functions as individuals get to know, and learn to work with, each
other. Close proximity fosters greater awareness that leads to better understanding of the
goals, strategies, and challenges of each group. Also, internal customers are more likely to
involve supply in decisions if the buyer is readily accessible when questions arise. Buyers
can “sell” other departments on their worth by providing market intelligence including
information on availability, suppliers, and specifi c commodities. The best selling point is
a measurable outcome such as cost reduction, improved quality, or a better specifi cation.
Co-location of Suppliers in the Buying Organization As organizations look for ways to do more work with fewer people and achieve the produc-
tivity and competitiveness goals of the fi rm, they are increasingly looking to suppliers for
expertise and assistance. Having key supplier personnel located in the buying organization
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 65joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 65 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
66 Purchasing and Supply Management
who can function as buyers, planners, and salespeople can improve buyer–seller commu-
nications and processes, absorb work typically done by the fi rm’s employees, and reduce
administrative and sales costs.
Supplier CouncilsA number of large fi rms, such as General Motors and Boeing, use supplier councils to man-
age supplier relationships. Supplier councils usually consist of 10 to 15 senior executives
from the company’s preferred supplier base, along with six to eight of the buying fi rm’s top
management. For example, General Motors has two primary forums for formal discussions
with suppliers. The GM Supplier Business Council consists of 10 global suppliers who
meet with the vice president of global purchasing and supply chain on a monthly basis to
address broad, industrywide topics. The second forum is a global GM Supplier Business
Meeting that is webcasted to GM’s suppliers each month to gain input on GM-specifi c
topics. Suppliers who participate in this webcast represent approximately 80 percent of the
value of GM vehicles.
Supplier councils usually meet two to four times per year and deal with supply policy
issues at the buying fi rm with the objectives of developing relationships and improving
communication with the supply base. Supplier councils allow suppliers to be proactive par-
ticipants in the supply management activities at the buying fi rm and can be useful forums to
communicate strategies to key suppliers, identify problems with the supply base early on,
and agree upon competitive targets in areas such as cost, quality, and delivery.
Supply CouncilsSupply councils, also referred to as purchasing councils, are generally comprised of se-
nior supply staff and are established to facilitate coordination among the business units,
divisions, or plants. Many fi rms use supply councils as a means of sharing information
among decentralized units, or coordinating activities focused on a specifi c problem that
might involve several supply groups. The goals of the council are to manage buyer–supplier
relationships properly and to encourage continuous improvement.
For example, Wellman, a manufacturer and distributor of polyester fi bers and PET res-
ins, had a decentralized supply organization, where plant purchasing reported to the local
manager at each site. The corporate purchasing council consisted of site purchasing leader-
ship. It concentrated on standardizing purchasing processes, standardizing goods and ser-
vices across sites, aggregating requirements and leveraging volume for lower prices, and
simplifying and streamlining the materials process. The council also formulated annual
business plans and objectives for purchasing.9
CONSORTIA
Purchasing consortia are a form of collaborative purchasing that is used by both public
and private-sector organizations as a means of delivering a wider range of services at a
lower total cost. Purchasing consortia can take one of several forms, ranging from informal
groups that meet regularly to discuss purchasing issues, to the creation of formal central-
ized consortia for the purpose of managing members’ supply activities. Consortia are quite
9 Leenders and Johnson, Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 66joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 66 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 67
common in not-for-profi t organizations, particularly educational institutions and health
care organizations. Interest in the concept in the for-profi t sector was sparked by the ability
to run Internet-based consortiums, also called electronic exchanges or marketplaces, and
the lack of antitrust obstacles (see Chapters 4 and 15).
Savings through price reductions are a primary motivation for the creation and partici-
pation in purchasing consortia. Other benefi ts are opportunities for staff reductions, prod-
uct and service standardization, improved supplier management capabilities, specialization
of staff, and better customer service.
Despite the benefi ts, hesitation to participate in consortia may be due to concerns about:10
• Antitrust issues. Collaboration might be viewed as anticompetitive by the U.S. Depart-
ment of Justice’s Antitrust Division and/or the Federal Trade Commission.
• Bureaucracy. The consortium may become bureaucratic, diffi cult to manage, and costly
to coordinate.
• Complexity. Fear that “open enrollment” will bring together buyers with widely diverse
needs and philosophies toward buyer–seller relations, resulting in untenable complexity
and dysfunction.
• Competitors. Fear that the competition might be allowed to join.
• Confi dentiality. Disclosure of sensitive information. Therefore, most items purchased
through consortia are nonstrategic, such as MRO components and routine services.
• Supplier resistance. Strong suppliers may resist participating in consortium arrangements.
• Distribution channels. Some believe existing distributors provide adequate pricing and
services.
• Equality. A fi rm currently has preferred relationships with suppliers/free riding. The
unequal size of member organizations can create diffi culties with respect to the alloca-
tion of benefi ts.
• Uncertainty. Some were concerned costs would not decline and service levels would.
• Standardization and compliance. The degree of uniqueness of requirements and the
costs of standardizing products and services.
• Governance. Loss of control and reporting relationships were concerns.
Successful consortia are able to address these hurdles by achieving the following six
objectives:11
1. Reducing total costs for the members through lower prices, higher quality, and better
services.
2. Eliminating and avoiding all real and perceived violations of antitrust regulations.
3. Installing sufficient safeguards to avoid real and perceived threats concerning disclo-
sure of confidential and proprietary information.
10 T. E. Hendrick, Purchasing Consortiums: Horizontal Alliances among Buying Firms Buying Common Goods and Services ( Tempe, AZ: Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, 1997); P. F. Johnson, “The Pattern of Evolution in Public Sector Purchasing Consortia,” International Journal of Logistics: Research & Applications 2, no. 1 (1999), pp. 57–73.11 Hendrick, Purchasing Consortiums: Horizontal Alliances among Buying Firms Buying Common Goods and Services.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 67joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 67 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
68 Purchasing and Supply Management
4. Mutual and equitable sharing of risks, costs, and benefits to all stakeholders, including
buying firms/members, suppliers, and customers.
5. Maintaining a high degree of trust and professionalism of the consortium stakeholders.
6. Maintaining a strong similarity among consortium members and compatibility of
needs, capabilities, philosophies, and corporate cultures.
Conclusion There is no one perfect organizational structure for supply. Its organizational structure will
mirror the overall corporate structure. The challenge for supply executives is to maximize
the benefits of their organizational structure, whether it is centralized, decentralized, or
hybrid. Major research into organizational issues over the last decade has provided use-
ful insights into innovative attempts to integrate the supply function and suppliers more
effectively into organizational goals and strategies. No matter where the supply function
is situated on the organization chart, each individual member of the supply organization
has the opportunity to improve relations with internal customers and suppliers in an effort
to make a greater contribution to organizational objectives.
1. Relate the objectives of supply to (1) a company producing automobiles, (2) a large
fast-food restaurant chain, (3) a financial institution, and (4) an integrated oil company.
2. What are the challenges faced by a supply manager working in a highly centralized
structure? In a highly decentralized structure?
3. How does specialization within supply differ in small and large organizations?
4. What are the reasons for giving the CPO a title and reporting line equal to marketing,
engineering, or other key business functions?
5. What are indicators that supply is “meaningfully involved”?
6. What are the challenges in expanding the role of the CPO?
7. What implementation factors would you consider when asked to change the supply
organization from a centralized to a hybrid structure? What factors would you consider
if moving from decentralized to centralized?
8. How is team buying likely to affect the purchasing/supply function over the next decade?
9. Why and how would you go about setting up a consortium for the purchase of fuel, oil,
furniture, corrugated cartons, or office supplies?
Driedonks, B. A.; J. M. P. Gevers; A. J. van Weele. “Managing Sourcing Team
Effectiveness: The Need for a Team Perspective in Purchasing Organizations.” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 16, no. 2 (2010), pp. 109–117.
Feisel, E.; E. Hartmann; L. C. Giunipero. “The Importance of the Human Aspect in the
Supply Function: Strategies for Developing PSM Proficiency.” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 17, no. 1 (2011), pp. 54–67.
Hendrick, Thomas E. Purchasing Consortiums: Horizontal Alliances among Firms Buying Common Goods and Services. Tempe, AZ: Center for Advanced Purchasing
Studies, 1997.
References
Questions for Review and Discussion
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 68joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 68 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 69
Hendrick, Thomas E., and Jeffrey Ogden. Chief Purchasing Officers’ Compensation Benchmarks and Demographics: A 2001 Study of Fortune 500 Firms. Tempe, AZ:
Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, 2002.
Johnson, P. Fraser. “Supply Organizational Structures.” Critical Issues Report, CAPS
Research, August 2003.
Johnson, P. Fraser. “The Pattern of Evolution in Public Sector Purchasing Consortia.”
International Journal of Logistics: Research and Applications 2, no. 1 (1999), pp. 57–73.
Johnson, P. F., and M. R. Leenders. Supply’s Organizational Roles and Responsibilities.
Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, May 2012, 118 pages.
Johnson, P. F., and M. R. Leenders, Supply Leadership Changes. Tempe, AZ: CAPS
Research, 2007.
Leenders, Michiel R., and P. Fraser Johnson. Major Structural Changes in Supply Organizations. Tempe, AZ: Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, 2000.
Leenders, Michiel R., and P. Fraser Johnson. Major Changes in Supply Chain Responsibilities. Tempe AZ: Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, 2002.
McCue, Cliff, and Eric Prier. “Using Agency Theory to Model Cooperative Public
Purchasing.” Journal of Public Procurement 8, no. 1, 2008, pp. 1–35.
Nollet, Jean, and Martin Beaulieu, “Should an Organization Join a Purchasing Group?”
Supply Chain Management 10, no. 1 (2005), pp. 11–17.
Schneider, L., and C. M. Wallenburg. “50 Years of Research on Organizing the Purchasing
Function: Do We Need Any More?” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 19, no. 3 (2013), pp. 144–164.
General Motors 2013 Sustainability Report, www.gmsustainability.com/report.html#/issues/
supply, accessed February 17, 2014.
Case 3–1
Iowa Elevators
Scott McBride, director of purchasing at Iowa Elevators,
was reviewing information collected by his analyst, Cathy
Ritchie, as he prepared for a meeting with the executive
management team scheduled for Wednesday, June 11.
Scott had been asked by Walter Lettridge, Iowa Eleva-
tor’s CEO, to present a five-year plan for the purchasing
department at the meeting. In preparation for the meet-
ing, Scott asked Cathy to prepare a report analyzing all
expenditures made by the company with outside suppliers
over the previous year. It was now June 3, and Scott knew
there was still a lot of work that had to be completed to get
ready for the meeting the following week.
IOWA ELEVATORSIowa Elevators was one of the largest grain-handling com-
panies in the United States. Headquartered in Des Moines,
Iowa, the company had annual revenues of $2.3 billion
and employed more than 2,500 people. Its two business
units were the grain-handling and marketing division and
the farm supplies division.
The grain-handling and marketing division operated
approximately 300 grain elevators in the Midwest. This
division represented approximately 75 percent of total
company revenues, although total revenues had declined
by 20 percent from the previous year due to drought con-
ditions that had affected farm crop production. Over the
previous five years, the company had invested heavily in
upgrading its elevator system to improve throughput and
increase capacity in key regions.
The farm supplies division sold crop-protection prod-
ucts, equipment and supplies, fertilizer, and seed through its
network of country elevators and approximately 30 market-
ing centers. Revenues for this division had doubled over the
previous five years as part of a strategy to tap the company’s
country elevator network to diversify its revenue base.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 69joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 69 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
70 Purchasing and Supply Management
Iowa Elevators had a past reputation for steady finan-
cial performance and profitability. However, the company
had seen a steady decline in profitability over the previous
three years. In the most recent fiscal year, it experienced
a loss of $11 million after taxes and a sharp decline in
working capital. Management attributed its disappointing
results to lower volumes in its grain-handling and market-
ing division and increased competition. Despite its rising
market share, operating margins at the farm supplies divi-
sion had remained flat.
Concern over the financial performance of the com-
pany led to a decision by the board of directors to make
changes to the executive team. In February, Walter
Lettridge, a veteran of the grain-handling industry, was
brought in as the new president and CEO. Shortly after-
ward, Jose Sousa joined Iowa Elevators as the new chief
financial officer. Both Walter and Jose had worked to-
gether at a competitor of Iowa Elevators.
Immediately after joining the company, Walter went to
work creating a major cost-cutting initiative, which would in-
clude reductions in headcounts, capital expenditure budgets,
and overhead expenses. As part of this process, Scott McBride
was asked to present a five-year plan to the executive man-
agement team, including annual cost reduction targets.
PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT Scott supervised a group of 11 people (see Exhibit 1) who
were responsible for the acquisition of requirements for
head office and some regional sales and administrative
offices. Its major purchases were information technology
(hardware and software); printing for forms, brochures,
and advertising; office supplies; and company automobile
leases. The only change in the purchasing organization
within the last year had been the addition of a travel coor-
dinator as a result of a contract for air travel and car rent-
als. The purchasing organization was part of the corporate
services organization, which also included the human re-
sources and information technology groups, and reported
to the CFO.
Iowa Elevators had a history of decentralized man-
agement, with individual divisions held accountable for
their own operations and bottom-line performance. As a
result, local elevator managers acted autonomously but
were responsible for local market share and profitability.
In addition, the elevator managers also made decisions
concerning the amount and variety of crop-protection
products, fertilizer, and seed stock to handle in their retail
Scott McBride
Director
Manager
Other Purchases & Fleet
Supervisor
Assistant
Buyer
Analyst
Expediting
Clerk
Invoice
Clerk
Manager IT
Purchasing
Asset
Management
Clerk
Buyer
Travel
CoordinatorCathy Ritchie
Analyst
Jose Sousa
CFO
EXHIBIT 1 Iowa Elevators Purchasing Department
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 70joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 70 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 71
operation. Purchases for elevator operations were handled
locally and monitored based on spending limits set in an-
nual operating budgets.
The farm supplies division had a group of four product
managers who were responsible for the three main prod-
uct segments (crop-protection products, equipment and
supplies, and fertilizer and seed). These individuals were
responsible for supplier selection, product mix, branding,
and promotion and assisted elevator and marketing center
managers in the areas of promotion, new product develop-
ment, and inventory planning.
ANALYSIS OF CORPORATE SPENDIn a meeting in early May, Scott was asked by Walter
Lettridge and Jose Sousa to present his five-year plan for
the purchasing department at an executive management
team meeting on June 11. Walter had scheduled time for a
number of senior managers to present their plans and ideas
aimed at returning the company to profitability. During
the meeting, Walter commented to Scott: “I expect pur-
chasing to deliver cost savings and your group needs to
play a more significant role in the company. You need to
explain what you can deliver and explain how you intend
to accomplish your objectives. As far as I am concerned,
everything is on the table right now. We need to return the
company to profitability and I am not afraid to make some
major changes in terms of how we run this business.”
Recognizing the need to present a thorough plan,
Scott enlisted the support of his analyst, Cathy Ritchie,
to help him collect and organize data. The data collec-
tion focused on two questions: (1) How much money
did Iowa Elevators spend with its outside suppliers? and
(2) How much inventory did the company carry? The data
collection process had been complicated by the variety of
management systems at different levels and at different
locations. Scott believed that if more time had been avail-
able, Cathy might have been able to capture more spend
and inventory data.
Cathy’s analysis identified a total corporate spend of
$728 million. Although the company dealt with more than
1,500 suppliers, 20 suppliers accounted for approximately
45 percent of the total spend and the top five represented
35 percent. (The top five suppliers consisted of two rail-
way companies and three suppliers to the farm supplies
division for crop protection and fertilizer.) She estimated
that average annual inventories in the farm supplies divi-
sion were nearly $120 million with annual purchases of
$310 million. A summary of Cathy’s key findings is re-
ported in Exhibits 2 and 3.
EXHIBIT 2 Total Purchases by Category ($000)
Spend Category Annual Spend*
Farm supplies $ 254, 406Information technology and telecommunications 17, 187Fees, levies, memberships 26, 301Energy 8, 602Financial services and interest expense 24, 461Fleet 4, 229Insurance 5, 239Packaging 10, 551Professional services 7, 708MRO & construction 127, 829Transportation services 208, 927Travel and entertainment 3, 557Other 17, 350Miscellaneous and unclassified 11, 926
Total $ 728, 273
* Data for the most recent fiscal year.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 71joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 71 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
72 Purchasing and Supply Management
THE MIS PROPOSALScott was aware that the MIS Group had been asked to
make a similar presentation to the executive management
team. The chief information officer (CIO) had informed
Scott that he would be requesting $10 million in addi-
tional spending beyond standard upgrades over the next
five years with anticipated cost savings of about $500,000
per year.
PREPARATION FOR THE MEETINGScott viewed the upcoming meeting as an opportunity
to redefine the role of purchasing at Iowa Elevators. His
session with executive management was expected to last
approximately 90 minutes, and he wanted to prepare a
five-year plan with specific objectives for each year,
including cost reduction targets. In particular, his plan
for the coming year had to be very specific and include
identifiable projects and initiatives, schedules, project
plans, and expected costs and benefits.
As part of his proposal, Scott also wanted to establish
a budget and human resource requirements that would be
needed to support his recommendations. While he regarded
his staff as competent, Scott recognized that he would
require new managerial resources if the role of corporate
purchasing was to be expanded. Consequently, he also
planned on proposing a new organization structure and
establishing a headcount plan and budget for the purchas-
ing department.
As Scott reviewed Cathy’s report, he began consider-
ing where he was going to start and what could be accom-
plished. His major concern would be resistance from the
divisions and field elevator managers, and he wondered
what, if anything, could be done to address any organiza-
tional resistance to his recommendations.
EXHIBIT 3 Farm Supplies Division Inventory ($000)
Category Average Inventory Annual Purchases
Crop protection products $ 65,098 $ 124, 696Equipment and supplies 22,388 13, 743Fertilizer 20,938 130, 557Seed 10,389 41, 787
Total $ 118,813 $ 310, 783
Case 3–2
Lambert-Martin Automotive Systems Inc.
Arthur Thomas, vice president of global purchasing, En-
gine Systems Group at Lambert-Martin Automotive Sys-
tems Inc. (Lambert-Martin), was preparing for the biggest
challenge of his career. Bill McLaren, president and CEO,
had asked Arthur the previous day to take over as the com-
pany’s new chief purchasing officer (CPO), replacing Jeff
Trudell, who was retiring in two months, after eight years
in the role. As a first step, Bill asked Arthur to put together
some ideas regarding potential changes to the purchasing
organization at Lambert-Martin. During their meeting, Bill
commented, “Our business plan calls for the company to
grow from $10 billion in sales this year to $15 billion in
five years. It is essential that we take advantage of opportu-
nities in our supply chain to support our growth objectives
and to keep costs in line.”
Bill suggested that Arthur review the current organi-
zation structure, develop alternatives, and meet with the
group vice presidents to solicit their input. It was Tuesday
November 6, and Arthur was scheduled to meet with Bill
at the end of the month to review his preliminary ideas
and recommendations.
LAMBERT-MARTIN AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS INC.Lambert-Martin was a U.S.-based supplier to the global
automotive industry, with headquarters in Troy, Michigan.
Its origins dated back to the early days of the automotive
industry, when the company was formed in 1924 with the
merger of Lambert Clutch and Gear Company and Martin
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 72joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 72 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
Chapter 3 Supply Organization 73
Engine Systems. It was a recognized leader in drivetrain
technology, providing innovative products that improved
fuel economy, emissions, and performance. Its main prod-
uct lines were drivetrain components, including transmis-
sion control units, engine valve components, friction ma-
terials, and turbochargers. With 70 manufacturing facilities
across 22 countries, it provided components to most major
original equipment manufacturers.
The company invested heavily in product engineer-
ing and new product development. Its engineers worked
closely with customers on new vehicle programs, and the
Lambert-Martin Technology Center, also located in Troy,
was a source of new product innovation.
Lambert-Martin operated under a decentralized model
with five business groups: Engine Systems, Emission
Products, Ignition Technology, Engine Cooling Systems
and Transmission Technology. Corporate office func-
tions included accounting and finance, human resources,
engineering, information technology, legal, and a small
purchasing staff. Group vice presidents operated autono-
mously with control over sales and manufacturing opera-
tions, including purchasing.
The largest group by sales was Transmission Technol-
ogy, with annual revenues of approximately $3 billion,
while annual revenues at the other four groups ranged
from $1.5 to $2.0 billion. For the most recent fiscal year,
cost of sales represented 80 percent of revenues, while
purchases were 50 percent; and selling, general, and ad-
ministrative expenses were 9 percent. Net earnings after
tax were $690 million.
The Purchasing OrganizationMost purchasing staff were located in the five business
groups, each with a vice president of purchasing that re-
ported directly to their respective group vice president.
The group purchasing functions were responsible for
commodity strategies, sourcing, quality control, cost re-
ductions, and supplier development. The corporate pur-
chasing group managed the supplier technology portal,
supplier scorecards, risk management reporting, and the
supplier manual. Historically, the CPO had a dual role
as vice president of purchasing for one of the groups as
well as responsibility for the corporate purchasing orga-
nization. For example, Jeff Trudell had the title of vice
president global supply for the Transmission Technology
Group as well as being the company’s CPO. Similarly, in
his new role, Arthur would maintain his current position
as vice president of global purchasing, Engine Systems
Group, and add the corporate CPO title.
PREPARING FOR THE MEETINGSArthur Thomas was a mechanical engineer with 20 years
of experience in the automotive parts industry. He joined
Lambert-Martin 15 years prior, originally working in engi-
neering and product management in the Emission Products
Group. After five years in engineering, Arthur was asked to
join the purchasing organization in Engine Systems, where
he held positions as strategic sourcing manager, director of
supplier development, and director of commodity manage-
ment before being promoted to his current role, which he
had held for the last three years.
As vice president of global purchasing for the Engine
Systems Group, Arthur reported to Bill McLaren, who, un-
til his recent promotion, had been group vice president of
Engine Systems. During his tenure as head of purchasing
for the group, Arthur could see where Lambert-Martin’s
decentralized purchasing organizational structure con-
strained the company from capturing important opportuni-
ties in its supply chain. Specifically, the lack of communi-
cation among the purchasing organizations in the business
groups meant that spend information for common suppliers
was not shared, thereby potentially missing opportunities
for price reductions through consolidation of purchases.
Secondly, Arthur felt that because purchasing in each of
the groups had separate organizations for sourcing, qual-
ity control, and supplier development, it would be possible
to reduce overhead costs and improve the effectiveness of
these activities through increased centralization.
Arthur had recently read a focus study report pre-
pared by CAPS Research, Supply’s Organizational Roles and Responsibilities, which indicated that approximately
10 percent of the large companies in the survey had de-
centralized purchasing organizational structures, and the
majority—approximately two-thirds—used the hybrid
structure. With a new CEO who was looking for oppor-
tunities to make positive changes at the company, Arthur
thought this would be a good time to take a fresh look at
Lambert-Martin’s purchasing organizational structure and
the roles and responsibilities of the groups and head office
functions. His meetings with the five group vice presidents
were scheduled for mid-November. As he sat at his desk,
Arthur wondered what questions he should ask during these
meetings. Buy-in from the group vice presidents would be
essential if any major changes were to occur. Furthermore,
Bill McLaren was expecting some alternatives from Arthur
regarding where he saw opportunities and how the purchas-
ing function would be able to make a greater contribution to
the strategic and financial goals of Lambert-Martin.
joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 73joh24099_ch03_044-073.indd 73 27/08/14 2:21 PM27/08/14 2:21 PM
74
Chapter Outline
The Supply Management ProcessStrategy and Goal AlignmentEnsuring Process Compliance Information FlowsSteps in the Supply Process
1. Recognition of Need
2. Description of NeedPurposes and Flow of a RequisitionTypes of RequisitionsEarly Supply and Supplier Involvement
3. Identifi cation of Potential Sources Issue an RFx
4. Supplier Selection and Determination of Terms
5. Preparation and Placement of the Purchase Order
6. Follow-Up and ExpeditingAssess Costs and Benefi ts
7. Receipt and InspectionEliminate or Reduce Inspection
8. Invoice Clearing and PaymentAligning Supply and Accounts
PayableCash Discounts and Late Invoices
9. Maintenance of Records and RelationshipsLinking Data to Decisions Manage Supplier Relationships
Improving Process Effi ciency and EffectivenessA Supply Process Flowchart Strategic Spend Nonstrategic Spend
Information Systems and the Supply ProcessBenefi ts of Information Systems TechnologyERP SystemsCloud Computing and the Supply Chain Electronic Procurement SystemsElectronic or Online CatalogsEDIMarketplacesOnline Reverse AuctionsRadio Frequency Identifi cation (RFID)
Implications for Supply
Policy and Procedure Manual
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases4–1 Qmont Mining4–2 Eastern Pharmaceuticals Ltd.4–3 Portland Bus Company
Chapter Four
Supply Processes and Technology
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 74joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 74 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 75
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Use an e-procurement system to improve the effi ciency of the supply process?
• Use online reverse auctions to buy goods and services?
• Consider establishing a supplier-managed inventory program for MRO requirements?
How can we
• Handle lower-value purchases more effi ciently?
• Streamline the process so that supply managers are more involved in the earlier stages?
• Communicate more effectively with our internal business partners?
Identifying and streamlining key business processes to reduce costs, grow revenues, and
manage assets represents an opportunity in most organizations. Critical processes are em-
bedded in all areas of the organization, including new product development, supply, opera-
tions, marketing, sales, and accounts payable. Managing these processes, understanding
what makes each process effi cient and effective, and clarifying how each process interacts
with other processes and activities are critical to the success of the organization as a whole.
Understanding how and when to apply information technology solutions to business pro-
cesses is also an ongoing challenge.
Purchases can represent 50–70 percent of costs for manufacturing organizations and
30–40 percent for service fi rms. While this indicates the importance of supply in procuring
a signifi cant portion of organizational resources, it also suggests the challenges of design-
ing an effi cient and effective process for a diverse spend. Ultimately, however, the simplest
defi nition of supply is the exchange of money (the buyer’s responsibility) for goods and
services (the supplier’s responsibility).
The fi rst key decision is: Which process or processes will be most effective and effi cient
to support this exchange? The options for managing the information fl ows of a supply pro-
cess have expanded along with supply management’s range of responsibilities. The nature
of the requirement will dictate the information exchanges between the purchaser and sup-
plier. Is the purchase one-time or repetitive? How are volumes, specifi cations, and shipping
schedules communicated? Are the purchases part of a short-term or long-term contract?
How will prices be established and how will payment be made?
The acquisition process is closely tied to almost all other business processes and also
to the external environment, creating a need for complete information systems and cross-
functional cooperation. For example, supply must work with engineering to determine
specifi cations, operations to determine production schedules, and fi nance to arrange pay-
ment. In the past 30 years, there have been remarkable advancements in information tech-
nology used in the recording, transmission, analysis, and reporting of information within
organizations and their supply chain networks.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 75joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 75 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
76 Purchasing and Supply Management
Most people recognize the strategic importance of information and knowledge manage-
ment. They also recognize that technology provides tools that can improve effi ciency and
effectiveness when applied appropriately to a business process. The Internet and availabil-
ity of integrated systems, such as enterprise resource planning (ERP) software, have had a
substantial impact on the acquisition process and its management. Supply managers need
to stay abreast of technological developments and be able to assess the fi t of each new tool
with the organization’s goals and strategy. Thus, the second key decision is: What informa-
tion systems might be used to support or enable effi cient and effective processes?
This chapter focuses, fi rst, on the critical steps of a robust supply management process,
one with structure and discipline. Once the basic supply process is understood, tools and
techniques are addressed that might improve the effi ciency and effectiveness of the en-
tire process or specifi c categories of spend. If the process itself is fl awed, then a process
improvement program must be undertaken before the process is automated. Remember,
process fi rst and technology last.
THE SUPPLY MANAGEMENT PROCESS
A process is a set of activities that has a beginning and an end, occurs in a specifi c sequence,
and has inputs and outputs. The supply management process starts with need recognition
and ends with monitoring suppliers and relationships. The steps include: recognize and de-
scribe need, identify potential sources, select source(s), determine price and terms, follow
up and expedite, receive, pay invoice, and monitor.
A process-oriented person considers the fl ow of information, materials, services, and
capital throughout the process no matter how many functions or departments touch it. A
functionally oriented person only considers the steps for which his or her department is
responsible. If supply personnel are not involved until potential sources are identifi ed, they
and the internal business partner may miss the opportunity for supply and suppliers to add
value in the need recognition and description stages. Waste is driven into the process in the
forms of unnecessary costs, long cycle times, and missed opportunities because the buying
organization, operating out of functional silos, manages the process sequentially rather than
simultaneously.
Five major reasons for developing a robust supply process are as follows:
1. Large number of items.
2. Large dollar volume involved.
3. Need for an audit trail.
4. Severe consequences of poor performance.
5. Potential contribution to effective organizational operations inherent in the function.
Strategy and Goal AlignmentThe fi rst step in optimizing the supply process is building internal consensus around the
opportunities to add value to the organization. The focus is: Where, when, and how can
supply contribute to short- and long-term goals and strategies of the organization?
Vertical and horizontal alignment of strategy and goals is required for supply to fully
contribute to the organization. Vertically, if the supply strategy at the functional or business
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 76joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 76 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 77
unit level is out of sync with organizational strategy, then supply decisions will hinder
rather than assist with the achievement of organizational goals (see Chapter 2).
Horizontal alignment between and among functional areas is also required. For exam-
ple, to attain profi tability targets, the fi nance group’s cash fl ow goals may lead to a payment
policy that confl icts with the supply group’s goal to contribute to profi tability through long-
term partnerships with key suppliers in which payment terms were a key negotiating point.
Personnel at all levels must work to align strategies and goals vertically and horizontally to
maximize organizational opportunities.
Individuals from many functions play valuable roles in a successful acquisition process.
The users and specifi ers of the good or service (supply’s internal customers or internal
business partners) play a role in recognizing and describing the need. They are usually
the budget owners and the primary information sources for technical descriptions; volume
requirements; and quality, delivery, and service targets.
How and when internal users communicate with supply varies. Sometimes internal cus-
tomers hand off information to supply once they have clearly defi ned the requirement.
Other times, supply personnel bring market intelligence such as supply availability, price
trends, or new technology to the need recognition and description stages. When value
can be created in the early stages of the process, the internal business partners and supply
should interact early and often in cross-functional sourcing teams, new product or service
design teams, and commodity management teams (see Chapter 3).
Often, however, supply takes the lead role in analyzing and selecting the supplier(s)
and determining price and other terms and conditions such as payment, delivery, quality
and service. Other functional areas may step in as well. For example, operations, logistics,
warehousing, shipping and receiving, legal, marketing, information systems, engineering,
and accounts payable all play a role in the process, but are typically part of different func-
tional areas with a different reporting line than supply.
Each stakeholder has goals and objectives relative to the purchase. When these confl ict,
the total cost of owning, consuming, and disposing of a purchase may increase unneces-
sarily. Because of this risk, many senior managers foster a process orientation through
cross-functional teams, and by creating shared or common goals, objectives, and metrics.
Ensuring Process Compliance Increasing the rate of internal compliance with the supply process can be challenging. Often
nonsupply staff make unauthorized buying decisions (sometimes referred to as “maverick
buying”) that lead to higher total cost of ownership and undermine supply’s credibility inter-
nally and externally. The root causes of noncompliance must be identifi ed and eliminated.
Organizational structure affects process compliance. In a highly decentralized organization
where supply decisions are made at the business unit, plant, or division level, supply coun-
cils composed of site leaders may be benefi cial. The council works to standardize goods, ser-
vices, and processes across sites; aggregate requirements and leverage volume for lower prices;
simplify and streamline the materials management process; formulate annual business plans;
and establish objectives for supply. Without a supply council and willing participation by site
supply leaders, the organization may have multiple suppliers of the same goods and services
with disparate prices, terms and conditions and varying levels of quality and service. Even in a
highly centralized organization there may be high levels of noncompliance. Process improve-
ments and consistent delivery of results to internal business partners may increase compliance.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 77joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 77 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
78 Purchasing and Supply Management
Organizational culture also infl uences process compliance. A mandate from top man-
agement to use the supply process can stop or reduce maverick buying in some organiza-
tional cultures. In others, mandates mean little and supply personnel must persuade and
convince users to comply.
Information systems may compel compliance by eliminating alternative purchasing paths,
reducing process cycle time, and instilling confi dence in users that delays will be minimal.
Information FlowsThere are four basic information fl ows involving supply.
Inward Flows (1) Information from within the organization is sent to supply, including
statements of need for materials and services. (2) Information from external sources is sent
to supply. This may come from suppliers (e.g., prices, and deliveries) or from other sources
(e.g., general market conditions and import duties).
Outward Flows (1) Information from within supply is sent to others within the organiza-
tion. This includes supplier pricing, market conditions, and supply forecasts for cash fl ow
budgeting. (2) Information, such as requests for quotes or proposals, is sent from supply to
external sources (e.g., suppliers).
Supply must be able to manage effectively information fl ows involving both internal and
external partners in the supply chain. Information systems enable the effi cient fl ow of informa-
tion and support effective decision making. These tools are discussed later in this chapter.
Steps in the Supply ProcessThe supply process is basically a communications process. Determining what needs to
be communicated, to whom, and in what format and time frame is at the heart of an ef-
fi cient and effective supply management process. It is essential for supply professionals to
determine when, where, and how they can add value and when, where, and how they can
extricate themselves from steps that are best left to other people or to technology.
The essential steps in the supply process are:
1. Recognition of need.
2. Description of need.
3. Identification and analysis of possible sources of supply.
4. Supplier selection and determination of terms.
5. Preparation and placement of purchase order.
6. Follow-up and/or expediting the order.
7. Receipt and inspection.
8. Invoice clearing and payment.
9. Maintenance of records and relationships.
1. RECOGNITION OF NEED
A purchase originates when a person or a system identifi es a defi nite need in the organization—
what, how much, and when it is needed.
The supply department helps anticipate the needs of using departments. Supply policy
and practice may encourage or require the use of standardized items, provide procedures
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 78joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 78 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 79
for special or unusual orders, and limit the use of rush orders. Also, since the supply
department tracks price trends and general market conditions, placing forward orders
may be essential to protect against shortage of supply or increased prices. Supply should
inform users of the normal lead time and any major changes for all standard purchased
items.
Since the greatest opportunity to affect value is when needs are recognized and de-
scribed (product or service conception and design), the supply manager and supplier can
contribute more in these steps than later in the acquisition process. (See Chapter 6 for ad-
ditional information on value creation.) Early supply and supplier involvement, often as
members of new product development teams, provides information that may lead to cost
avoidance or reduction, faster time to market, and greater competitiveness. As discussed
in Chapter 3, many organizations are turning to cross-functional teams to bring different
functional areas, and suppliers, into the process as early as possible.
2. DESCRIPTION OF NEED
The purchaser must know exactly what the internal customers want. And internal require-
ments should be driven by a clear understanding of the external customer’s needs. It is es-
sential to have an accurate description of the need, whether it is a tangible good, a service,
or goods and services bundled together. Unclear or ambiguous descriptions, or overspeci-
fi ed materials, services, or quality levels will lead to unnecessary costs. Supply manage-
ment and the user, or the cross-functional sourcing team, share responsibility for accurately
describing the item or service needed.
Purposes and Flow of a RequisitionA requisition is the document used to communicate needs internally between users/
specifi ers and supply management according to established internal controls. The fl ow of
the requisition is determined by who needs access to the information to perform their du-
ties, the need for an audit trail, and evidence of proper authorization.
A requisition is a gatekeeping tool to manage the fl ow of information through three
gates: (1) authority, (2) internal clarity, and (3) internal clearance.
Gate 1: Authority Does the requisitioner have the authority to make the specifi ed
request—goods or services—and at the specifi ed budget level? The supply department
establishes who has the power to requisition, prevents unauthorized requisitions, and com-
municates to suppliers that a requisition is not an order.
Gate 2: Internal Clarity Is the need described in a clear and unambiguous way? Uni-
form terms or standardized commodity or service codes should be used to describe re-
quired articles or services. The importance of proper nomenclature or commodity coding
cannot be overemphasized. The most effective way to secure this uniformity is to main-
tain a database of common purchased items. A coding structure that standardizes pur-
chases brings order and consistency and supports an effi cient and effective process. A
general catalog lists all the items used, and a stores catalog lists all items carried in stock.
Depending on the technological sophistication of the organization, catalogs may be in an
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 79joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 79 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
80 Purchasing and Supply Management
electronic fi le, on e-catalogs, or hard copy. Diffi culties arise when supplier codes (manu-
facturers or service providers), industry codes, and company codes are different. While
software is available to cleanse data and apply standard coding schemas, these tools are
not perfect.
If adequately planned and properly maintained, coding schemas promote uniformity
in description, reduce the number of odd sizes or grades of articles requisitioned, and
facilitate accounting and inventory procedures. If poorly planned, maintained, or used,
they may be confusing and expensive beyond their projected benefi ts. Convincing inter-
nal users that a standard item will suffi ce is an ongoing challenge for supply personnel.
Typically only one item is included on a purchase requisition, particularly for standard
items. For special items not regularly stocked, several items may be covered by one req-
uisition if for the same delivery date. This simplifi es recordkeeping, since specifi c items
are secured from different suppliers, call for different delivery dates, and require separate
purchase orders and treatment.
Gate 3: Internal Clearance Descriptions should be reviewed before preparing documen-
tation to communicate externally with potential suppliers. Quantity, based on anticipated
needs, should be compared to economical quantities. The delivery date should allow time
to secure quotations and samples, if necessary, and to execute the purchase order and ob-
tain delivery. The requisitioner should be notifi ed if there is a time or delivery constraint
that drives in additional expense. Consistent lack of adequate lead time is an indicator of a
process problem that must be analyzed and resolved.
This review may be performed by a buyer or a team or it may be system generated. In
an ERP or e-procurement system, preloaded data establish decision rules for requisition-
ing, order points, and suppliers and include triggers to send red fl ags for buyer review. It is
management by exception. Humans are fl agged when the system detects a problem based
on thresholds set by decision makers.
For lower-value and lower-risk purchases, the buyer should question a specifi cation
if a modifi cation would deliver more value. For example, the buyer might recommend a
substitute if there are market shortages or lower-priced or better alternatives. A high degree
of interaction between the buyer and the user is required in the early stages of need defi ni-
tion because of the impact of future market conditions. At best, an inaccurate description
may result in loss of time; at worst it may have serious fi nancial consequences and cause
disruption of supply, hard feelings internally, lost opportunity for a product or service im-
provement, and loss of supplier respect and trust.
Types of RequisitionsThere are several types of purchase requisitions, including standard requisitions, traveling
requisitions, a bill of materials, and stores/inventory requisition.
Standard Requisition The following information should be included on a standard
requisition:
1. Date.
2. Number (identification).
3. Originating department.
4. Account to be charged.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 80joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 80 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 81
5. Complete description of material or service desired and quantity.
6. Date material or service needed.
7. Any special shipping or service-delivery instructions.
8. Signature of authorized requisitioner.
Electronic requisitions typically have prefi lled fi elds for standard or recurring information.
Some organizations include fi elds for “suggested supplier” and “suggested price.”
Traveling Requisition People have always adopted and adapted new technology to busi-
ness processes. The traveling requisition was an innovation used for recurring require-
ments and standard parts to reduce operating expenses. In a manual system, the traveling
requisition is a form on cardstock that contains a complete description of the item. The
requisitioner sends the card to supply, indicating quantity and date needed. Supply enters
the supplier, price, and purchase order (PO) number on the traveler and sends it back to the
requisitioner, who fi les the card until the next reorder.
The process of determining which items are appropriate for use on a traveling req-
uisition and the fl ow of the information are useful when transitioning to an electronic
system.
Bill of Materials A bill of materials (BOM) simplifi es the requisitioning process for
frequently needed line items in organizations that make a standard item over a relatively
long period of time.
A BOM includes all materials and parts, including allowance for scrap, to make
one end unit: for example, a two-slice toaster. Production scheduling notifi es supply
of the quantity (e.g., 18,000) scheduled for production next month. Supply “explodes”
the BOM by multiplying through by 18,000 to determine the total quantity of material
needed for next month’s production. Comparison of these numbers with inventory yields
the open-to-buy fi gures. A materials requirement planning (MRP) or enterprise resource
planning (ERP) system is preloaded with pricing information on suppliers with long-
term agreements, and order releases are generated to cover the open-to-buy amounts.
(Chapter 8 provides more detail on MRP.)
Stores/Inventory Requisition Needs may be met by a material requisition from inventory
or the transfer of surplus stock from another department or division.
Early Supply and Supplier InvolvementFor purchases that are of strategic or critical value to the buying organization, it is usually
advisable to manage the process through a cross-functional sourcing team (see Chapter 3).
For lower-value purchases, the buyer should question a specifi cation if it appears that the
organization might be served better through a modifi cation. For example, the buyer might
recommend a substitute if there are market shortages of the desired commodity or lower-
priced or better alternatives are available. Since future market conditions play such a vital
role, it makes sense to have a high degree of interaction between the supply and specifying
groups in the early stages of need defi nition. At best, an inaccurate description may result
in some loss of time; at worst it may have serious fi nancial consequences and cause disrup-
tion of supply, hard feelings internally, lost opportunity for a product or service improve-
ment, and loss of supplier respect and trust.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 81joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 81 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
82 Purchasing and Supply Management
3. IDENTIFICATION OF POTENTIAL SOURCES
Supplier selection constitutes an important part of the supply function. It involves (1) iden-
tifying potential qualifi ed sources and (2) assessing the probability that a purchase agree-
ment would result in on-time delivery of satisfactory product/service with appropriate
before and after sale service at lowest total cost of ownership. Supplier selection is dis-
cussed in detail in Chapter 12, “Supplier Selection.” This section addresses the tools avail-
able to communicate with potential suppliers.
Issue an RFx When items are not covered by a contract, the buyer has four options for communicating
with potential suppliers: (1) Issue a request for information (RFI)—an optional step that is
not a solicitation for business. The three options for soliciting business are: (1) request for
quotation (RFQ), (2) request for proposal (RFP), or (3) request or invitation for bid (RFB
or IFB).
There are no commonly accepted defi nitions of these terms, so it is important for buyers
to communicate clearly to potential suppliers the analysis and selection process. Often each
solicitation tool signifi es a level of complexity of the purchase, dollar value, and degree of
risk the supplier bears.
Request for Information (RFI) An RFI is issued to gather information about potential suppliers’ products and services.
Even though the Internet enables fairly quick and easy searches, many supply organiza-
tions still prepare and send (electronically or by mail) RFIs to suppliers. An RFI is not a
solicitation for business or an offer to do business. As the name suggests, an RFI is for
information-gathering purposes only.
Request for Quotation (RFQ )Typically, an RFQ is issued when there is a clear and unambiguous description of the need:
for example, a grade of material, a stock-keeping unit (SKU), or other commonly accepted
terminology. An RFQ is basically a price comparison tool for commonly used commodi-
ties sold in an open and free market where quotations can be easily obtained.
The RFQ is a standard requisition form that includes a list of potential suppliers. It is
prepared, checked, signed, and transmitted electronically (e-procurement system, e-mail,
or fax) or mailed to potential suppliers. Quotations are recorded, the buyer selects a
supplier(s), typically on the basis of price, and a purchase order is prepared and placed
with the chosen supplier.
Request for Proposal (RFP)An RFP is used for more complex requirements in which price is only one of several key
decision factors. Typically the buyer is planning to negotiate price and terms. An RFP
includes a detailed description of the requirement and invites bidders to use their expertise
to develop and propose one or more solutions. The Northeastern Hospital case in Chapter 13
provides an example of an organization using an RFP and the process used to evaluate
proposals.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 82joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 82 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 83
Request for BidA request or invitation for bid is used in a competitive bid process with or without the
opportunity to negotiate after bid receipt. A detailed bid specifi cation package, similar to
an RFP, is developed. It is important to communicate to suppliers how the fi nal selection
will take place. Will this be a sealed competitive bid in which the contract will be awarded
based on the lowest bid? Will the bids be the starting point from which negotiations will
take place?
4. SUPPLIER SELECTION AND DETERMINATION OF TERMS
Analysis and selection of the supplier lead to order placement. Applicable tools range
from a simple bid analysis form to complex negotiations. Supplier selection methods are
discussed in Chapter 12; issues related to quality are covered in Chapter 7, quantity and
inventory in Chapter 8, delivery in Chapter 9, and pricing in Chapter 10.
5. PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF THE PURCHASE ORDER
A purchase order is used unless the supplier’s sales agreement or a release against a blanket
order is used instead. Failure to use the proper contract form may result in serious legal
complications or improper documentation. Even where an order is placed by telephone, a
confi rming written order should follow. In no instance—unless it is for minor purchases
from petty cash—should materials be bought without proper documentation.
All companies have purchase order forms. In practice, however, all purchases are not
governed by the conditions stipulated on the purchase order. Many are governed by the
sales agreement submitted by the seller. Every company seeks to protect itself as com-
pletely as possible. Responsibilities that the purchase order form assigns to the supplier are
often transferred to the buyer in the sales agreement. Therefore, management is anxious to
use its own sales agreement when selling its products and services, and its own purchase
order form when buying. Chapter 15 discusses the legal implications.
FormatPurchase order format and routing varies. The essential requirements are the serial
number, date of issue, name and address of the supplier, the quantity and description,
date of delivery, shipping directions, price, terms of payment, and conditions governing
the order.
The conditions might include:
1. Indemnification clause—to guard the buyer from damage suits caused by patent in-
fringement.
2. Price provisions, such as “If the price is not stated on this order, material must not be billed
at a price higher than last paid without notice to us and our acceptance thereof.”
3. A clause stating that no charges will be allowed for boxing, crating, or drayage.
4. Stipulation that the acceptance of the materials is contingent on inspection and quality.
5. A requirement, in case of rejection, that the seller receive a new order before replacement
is made.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 83joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 83 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
84 Purchasing and Supply Management
6. A precise description of quality requirements and the method of quality assurance/
control.
7. Provision for cancellation of the order if deliveries are not received on the date speci-
fied in the order.
8. A statement that the buyer refuses to accept drafts drawn against the buyer.
9. Quantity provisions for overshipments or undershipments.
10. Special interest provisions—for example, arbitration or the disposition of tooling.
RoutingWhile a discussion about routing may seem unnecessary in the age of electronic pro-
cesses, it is important to understand the fl ow of information. Who needs access to
purchase order information, and why? How information is made available, on paper
documentation or electronically, is a matter of process design and organizational
capability.
Externally, the supplier needs the information on a PO. Giving or sending a purchase
order does not constitute a contract until it has been accepted. Typically, the supplier sends
an acknowledgment to confi rm acceptance of the order and to complete the contract. What
constitutes mutual consent and the acceptance of an offer is primarily a legal question (See
Chapter 15). Without an acknowledgement, the buyer can only assume that delivery will
be made by the requested date. When delivery dates are uncertain, the buyer needs defi nite
information in advance to plan operations effectively.
Internally, the supply department requires access (electronically or hard copy), accounts
payable for the payment process, and receiving and/or stores to plan for and confi rm receipt
and incoming inspection if required.
Blanket and Open-End Purchase OrdersBlanket or open-end purchase orders reduce costs by reducing the number of purchase
orders issued. A blanket order usually covers a variety of items. An open-end order allows
for addition of items and/or extension of time. Blanket orders are used to buy maintenance,
repair, and operations (MRO) items and production-line requirements used in volume and
purchased repetitively over a period of months.
The original purchase order contains all negotiated terms and conditions for estimated
quantities over a period of time. Subsequently, releases of specifi c quantities are made
against the order. Releases may be executed by supply or, more effi ciently, by production
scheduling directly to the supplier. An open-end order may remain in effect for a year, or
until changes in design, material specifi cation, or conditions affecting price or delivery
necessitate renegotiations.
Master Service Agreement (MSA)A master service agreement is an agreement wherein the supplier(s) provides predeter-
mined services over a specifi ed period of time with total costs not to exceed an amount
previously agreed upon. The scope of work for each function or level of service is fully
defi ned and agreed upon before the period of performance starts. Costs are generally fi xed
for the period of performance and usually have a “not to exceed” value. MSAs are usually
awarded for periods of one year or longer.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 84joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 84 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 85
6. FOLLOW-UP AND EXPEDITING
After issuing a PO, the buyer may follow up and/or expedite the order.
Follow-up is routine order tracking to ensure the supplier can meet delivery prom-
ises. An appropriate follow-up date is indicated with the order. Progress inquiries may
be made by phone, e-mail, fax, or in-person. Early notifi cation of problems such as
production scheduling, quality, or delivery enables appropriate action. Follow-up on
strategic or critical spend, especially large-dollar and/or long lead-time buys, may be
about advance shipping notices (ASNs) or percentage of the production process com-
pleted as of a certain date. Follow-up may not occur on lower-value purchases or it
may be built into the electronic supply system whereby buyers are only notifi ed of
exceptions.
Responsibility for follow-up with a services supplier may be placed in the user de-
partment to help ensure user compliance with prior commitments and deadlines. Follow-
up on internal commitments may become a joint responsibility for the supply manager as
well as the supplier. Extensive user interface with supplier personnel before and during
service delivery also affects other aspects of services contract administration. For ex-
ample, if a service is performed on-site after hours, security check-in sheets and access
systems may be used to verify work patterns or area activity. Periodic site visits and
a walk-through of the facility with the supplier’s representative may lead to a better
understanding of user needs. Some form of benchmarking against other providers may
also be useful.
Figure 4–1 shows an example of a follow-up form.
Expediting is the application of pressure on a supplier to meet the original delivery
promise, to deliver ahead of schedule, or to speed up delivery of a delayed order. Threats of
order cancellation or loss of future business may be used. Expediting should be necessary
on only a small percentage of the POs issued. If the buyer has done a good job of analyzing
supplier capabilities, only reliable suppliers—ones who will perform according to the pur-
chase agreement—will be selected.
Frequently, expediting is caused by poor planning inside the buying organization and
may indicate the need for internal process improvements. If material requirements plan-
ning is adequate, the buyer should not need to ask a supplier to move up the delivery date
except in unusual situations. Of course, in times of severe scarcity, the expediting activity
assumes greater importance.
Assess Costs and Benefi tsOne of the costs of doing business with a supplier (and vice versa) is the cost associated
with follow-up and expediting. One form of risk assessment and mitigation is matching
the degree and type of follow-up with the spend category strategy (typically based on the
importance of the purchase to the organization).
Follow-up and expediting that cost more than the value added is a form of process waste.
It should be captured and included in the total cost of ownership assessment. Expediting
may be a prime target for root cause analysis and a reduction or elimination plan. Often,
the analysis reveals that the need for expediting is driven by decisions made in the buying
organization, not by the supplier, and internal change is needed.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 85joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 85 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
86 Purchasing and Supply Management
7. RECEIPT AND INSPECTION
The proper receipt of goods and services is of vital importance. Many smaller and single-
site organizations have centralized receiving in one department. Often receiving reports to
supply management (see Chapter 16). If just-in-time inventory management systems have
been implemented, materials from certifi ed suppliers or supplier partners bypass receiving
and inspection and are delivered directly to the point of use. (See Chapter 8.) Receiving
also may be bypassed for small-value purchases.
The prime purposes of receiving are to:
1. Confirm that the order placed has actually arrived.
2. Check that the shipment arrived in good condition.
3. Ensure the quantity ordered has been received.
4. Forward the shipment to its proper destination (storage, inspection, or use).
5. Ensure that proper documentation of the receipt is registered and accessible to appropri-
ate parties.
FIGURE 4–1 Follow-Up Form
Source: Arizona
Public Service
Company.Date
This is our Request
Please Answer Immediately
REPLY TO ITEMS CHECKED BELOW BY
❏ This Form ❏ Wire ❏ Phone
PURCHASE ORDER FOLLOW-UP(Please Rush Reply)
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT • P.O. BOX 21666 • PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85036
1. RUSH SHIPMENT. ADVISE EARLIEST DATE.
2. WHEN WILL SHIPMENT BE MADE?IF SHIPPED. ADVISE METHOD.
3. PLEASE TRACE SHIPMENT.
4. IF SHIPMENT HAS BEEN MADE, MAIL INVOICE, TODAY.
5. PLEASE MAIL RECEIPTED FREIGHT BILL.
6. WHY DID YOU NOT SHIP AS PROMISED?ADVISE WHEN YOU WILL SHIP.
7. WILL YOU SHIP ON DATE SHOWN ON PURCHASE ORDER?
8. RELEASE SHIPMENTS AS SHOWN UNDER REMARKS.
9. PLEASE MAIL US ACCEPTANCE COPY OR OURPURCHASE ORDER.
10. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE OUR ORDER.
11. PLEASE MAKE YOUR SHIPPING DATE MORE SPECIFIC.
12. WHEN WILL BALANCE OF ORDER BE SHIPPED.
13. WHEN WILL PRICES BE SUBMITTED? PLEASE RUSH.
14. PLEASE MAIL SHIPPING NOTICE.
15. PLEASE INDICATE OUR PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER ONPAPERS REFERRED TO OR ATTACHED.
16. WE HAVE NO RECORD OF TRANSACTION COVERED BY INVOICE.ADVISE DATE OF SHIPMENT, NAME OF PERSON PLACING ORDERAND FURNISH SIGNED DELIVERY RECEIPT COPY.
17. INVOICE RETURNED HEREWITH.
18. INVOICE IS REQUIRED IN COPIES.
19. PRICE OR DISCOUNT IS NOT IN ACCORDANCE WITH QUOTATION.
20. TERMS ON INVOICE ARE NOT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THEPURCHASE ORDER.
21. ENCLOSED INVOICE SENT TO US IN ERROR.
22. DIFFERENCE IN QUANTITY.
23. UNIT PRICE INCORRECT.
24. EXTENSION INCORRECT.
25. PURCHASE ORDER NO. LACKING OR INCORRECT.
26. SALES TAX DOES NOT APPLY – See reverse side of Purchase Order.
27. SHOULD BE BILLED F.O.B. DESTINATION.
28. HAVE YOU CONSIDERED THIS ORDER COMPLETE?
29.
Reply:
VendorBy
PurchasingBy
SEND WHITE AND PINK COPIES WITH CARBON INTACT. WHITE COPY IS RETURNED WITH REPLY. 510-00J
Our Purchase Order No. Request for Quotation No. Your Invoice No. Date Amount Your Reference
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 86joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 86 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 87
Shortages may occur because material has been lost in transit, short-shipped, tampered
with, or damaged in transit. Physical counts can be forced by blocking receiving from
access to the quantity ordered. If accurate amounts are entered into the system, the order
is closed out, inventory records updated, and the invoice cleared for accounts payable to
authorize payment.
Eliminate or Reduce InspectionOne goal of supply management is to ensure that quality is built in internally during the de-
sign stage and externally in the suppliers’ processes. This reduces or eliminates incoming
inspection. (See Chapter 7, “Quality”; Chapter 9, “Delivery”; and Chapter 13, “Supplier
Evaluation and Relations.”)
In a just-in-time (JIT) environment, production parts go right from the receiving dock to
production. This is only possible when the supplier is capable of achieving the right level
of quality consistently and the carrier is capable of meeting the delivery windows consis-
tently. When quality is not assured, incoming inspection is required. Damage may also
occur during transit, which has implications for carrier inspection and logistics processes.
Decisions must be made about the need for inspection, the appropriate type of inspection,
and the most cost-effi cient and effective method of inspection.
8. INVOICE CLEARING AND PAYMENT
An invoice is a claim against the buying organization. Typically it shows order number
and itemized price. Invoice clearance procedures are not uniform. Checks and audits of
invoices are established based on cost-benefi t analysis. The cost of a person’s time to re-
solve minor variances may exceed the value of the variance. A decision rule may be used
that stipulates payment of the invoice as submitted, as long as the difference is within pre-
scribed limits: for example, plus or minus 5 percent or $25, whichever is smaller. Accounts
payable tracks variances to identify suppliers that are intentionally short-shipping.
Payment for services may vary somewhat from payment for goods. Some services re-
quire prepayment, such as an eminent speaker; some, immediately upon delivery, such
as hospitality services, whereas others can be delayed, such as telephone services. It may
be diffi cult for small suppliers to offer extended payment terms, and early payment may
generate price or other concessions. Progress payments are usual for large contracts spread
over time, whereas regular payments are appropriate for ongoing services such as building
maintenance or food service.
Supply or accounting may be responsible for clearing invoices (see Chapter 16). If as-
signed to accounting, supply is relieved of a nonvalue-adding task, accounting tasks are
concentrated in a single function, and a check and balance is established between the com-
mitment to buy and payment. If assigned to supply, immediate action can be taken because
supply placed the original order.
When the invoice is handled by accounting in a paper-based process, the following
procedure is typical:
1. Duplicate invoices are mailed directly to the accounts payable (AP) department. AP
time-stamps, checks for accuracy, and certifies for payment except where the purchase
order and the invoice differ. AP files one copy; one is returned with payment.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 87joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 87 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
88 Purchasing and Supply Management
2. Invoices at variance with the purchase order on price, terms, or other features are re-
ferred to supply for approval.
If information is missing or does not agree with the purchase order, the invoice is returned
to the supplier for correction. Ordinarily, the buyer insists that discounts (see Chapter 10) be
computed from the receipt of the corrected invoice, not from the date originally received.
If a purchase order is canceled and cancellation charges are paid, supply provides ac-
counting with a “change notice” that defi nes the payment before approval.
If supply clears invoices, the procedure is:
1. After review and adjustments for corrections, the original invoice is forwarded to ac-
counting to be held until supply authorizes payment. The duplicate invoice is retained
by supply.
2. When the receiving report is sent to supply, it is checked against the invoice. If the two
agree, supply keeps both documents until it receives assurance from inspection that the
goods are acceptable.
3. Supply then forwards its duplicate copy of the invoice and the receiving report to account-
ing, where the original copy of the invoice is already on file. Accounting issues payment.
The three-way match of data from the purchase order, the invoice, and receiving also
occurs in an electronic procurement system.
Aligning Supply and Accounts PayableOften, payment terms are not met. The root causes of late payment are typically either slow
cycle time in the accounts payable process or confl ict between fi nance and supply policy.
Slow cycle time can occur because of errors on the invoice, paper-based processes, inef-
fi cient mailroom processes at the buying organization, and limited human resources in the
mailroom, accounting, and/or supply. Information systems and electronic fund transfers
may help address these problems by shortening the cycle time.
Lack of alignment causes confl ict between supply and accounting. Supply views suppli-
ers as valuable contributors to the organization’s success. Living up to the terms and con-
ditions of the contract is one indicator of the commitment to performance of both parties.
When buyers negotiate payment terms and their organization fails to live up to those terms,
this should be seen as a serious breach by all functional representatives.
Accounting views cash management as a primary contributor to the organization’s suc-
cess. Paying accounts as late as possible allows the buying organization the use of its
money for a longer period of time. The perspective on suppliers may be that they are ex-
pendable and easily replaceable.
Management may put accounts payable and supply into one department to force goal
alignment through structure and reporting relationship. Or accounts payable and supply
may serve on a joint team to resolve inconsistencies and align processes. The Ross Wood
case in Chapter 16 illustrates how changing the accounts payable process and combining
accounts payable and supply can improve process effi ciency and effectiveness.
Cash Discounts and Late InvoicesSometimes suppliers are slow to invoice, and supply must request the invoice. Or suppliers
request payment prior to the receipt of material or services. When invoices provide for cash
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 88joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 88 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 89
discounts, should you pay the invoice within the discount period, even though the material
may not actually have been received, or do you withhold payment until the material ar-
rives, even at the risk of losing cash discounts?
The arguments for withholding payment of the invoice until after the goods have
arrived are:
1. Frequently the invoice does not reach the buyer until late in the discount period or after
it, if the supplier fails to invoice promptly.
2. It is poor practice to pay without an opportunity for inspection. Legally, the title to the
goods may not pass to the buyer until acceptance of them.
3. Commonly, invoices are dated on the shipment date. The buyer should state that the
discount period runs from the later of either the date of goods receipt or invoice date.
The arguments for clearing the invoice for payment without awaiting the arrival, inspec-
tion, and acceptance of the material are:
1. The financial consideration from discounts may be substantial.
2. Failure to take the cash discounts reflects unfavorably on the credit standing of the
buyer.
3. With reputable suppliers, mutually satisfactory adjustments will be made easily.
9. MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS AND RELATIONSHIPS
The fi nal step is to update records, including supplier performance scorecards. Electronic
fi les or hard copies of the order-related documents are stored or fi led. Law, accounting
standards, company policy, and judgment determine which records are to be kept and for
how long. For example, a purchase order is evidence of a contract. It may be retained much
longer (normally seven years) than the requisition, which is an internal memorandum.
The basic records to be maintained, either manually or electronically, are:
1. PO log, which identifies all POs by number and indicates the open or closed status of each.
2. PO file, containing a copy of all POs, filed numerically.
3. Commodity file, showing all purchases of each major commodity or item (date, sup-
plier, quantity, price, PO number).
4. Supplier history file, showing all purchases placed with major suppliers.
5. Outstanding contracts against which orders are placed as required.
6. A commodity classification of items purchased.
7. A database of suppliers.
Additional record fi les may include:
1. Labor contracts, giving the status of union contracts (expiration dates) for all major
suppliers.
2. Tool and die record showing tooling purchased, useful life (or production quantity),
usage history, price, ownership, and location. This may prevent paying more than once
for the same tooling.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 89joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 89 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
90 Purchasing and Supply Management
3. Minority and small business purchases, showing dollar purchases from each.
4. Bid-award history, showing which suppliers were asked to bid, amounts bid, number of
no bids, and successful bidder, by major items. This may highlight supplier bid patterns
and possible collusion.
Linking Data to DecisionsData are collected throughout the supply management process. Turning data into usable
knowledge is a continuing challenge. From a process perspective, it is important to under-
stand what decisions need to be made; what information is relevant; where it can be found;
and how the information will be captured, analyzed, and disseminated to decision makers.
Often the problem is information overload that leads to “analysis paralysis,” rather than
a lack of information holding up a decision. Electronic tools designed to enable better deci-
sions though information management are discussed later in this chapter. Supplier metrics
are discussed in Chapter 13.
Manage Supplier RelationshipsInternal and external relationships are affected throughout the supply process. They may
be initiated, developed, damaged, repaired, or ended. Relationships with key supply chain
stakeholders internally and externally should be developed and assessed throughout the
process. See Chapter 13, “Supplier Evaluation and Relations.”
IMPROVING PROCESS EFFICIENCY AND EFFECTIVENESS
Once the basic information fl ows and communication techniques that comprise the supply
management process are understood, we return to the initial questions: (1) What process(es)
will be most effective and effi cient to support the buyer–supplier exchange? (2) What in-
formation systems might be used to support or enable effi cient and effective processes?
A Supply Process FlowchartThe fl owchart in Figure 4–2 demonstrates one way an organization might improve ef-
fi ciency and effectiveness of the supply management process. This begins with an assess-
ment of the nature of the spend. Is the purchase strategic?
Strategic SpendA common defi nition of strategic spend is goods or services critical to the mission of the
organization. This defi nition allows for high- and low-dollar-value purchases. How can the
supply process for strategic spend be made more effi cient (get more things done in a set
amount of time) and more effective (get more of the right things done)? And what is the
trade-off between effi ciency and effectiveness?
Early Supply and Supplier InvolvementAs the fl owchart depicts, a cross-functional sourcing team fosters communication through-
out the process, especially during the critical stages of need recognition and description. It
makes sense to apply time, money, people and other resources to mission-critical spend.
The goals are to assure continuous availability at the lowest total cost of ownership. In-
formation management tools enable this communication process and support decision
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 90joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 90 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 91
making. If a trade-off must be made, typically, effectiveness is favored over effi ciency in
strategic spend management.
Nonstrategic SpendFor nonstrategic (nonmission-critical) purchases (the right column of the fl owchart),
dollar value and repetitiveness drive process decisions. First, a small dollar threshold is
Obtain sponsorship
Is the acquisitionstrategic?
Is the acquisitionunder the small-dollar
threshold?
Is the supplier on theApproved Supplier List?
Use efficiency tools:procurement card,blanket orders,systems contracts,e-procurement,online catalogs, etc.
Process purchase order
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Form cross-functional team
Define project
Collect and analyze data
Select supplier
Implement
Prepare specs/SOW
Issue RFI (optional)
Issue RFQ, RFP, or RFB
Evaluate bidders
Select supplier
Implement
Measure, monitor, report
Measure, monitor, and report
Manage supplier relationship
Capture and transfer bestpractices
FIGURE 4–2 A Supply Process Flowchart
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 91joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 91 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
92 Purchasing and Supply Management
established and effi ciency tools, especially electronic ones, are used. Second, suppliers are
prequalifi ed and tools for effi cient order placement are used.
Effi ciency relates to the number of tasks performed in a set amount of time. For nonstra-
tegic spend, effi ciencies are gained by reducing the number of requisitions coming into the
supply department, the number of purchase orders issued to suppliers, and the number of
invoices and payments processed. Two continual problem areas for supply managers, small
value purchases and rush orders, are largely resolved through the use of effi ciency tools.
Small Value OrdersA Pareto analysis of annual spend usually reveals that roughly 70 to 80 percent of transac-
tions account for only 10 to 15 percent of spend. These are C items, typically, maintenance,
repair, and operating supplies (MRO), with low average transaction amounts. For some
goods and services that fall into this category it might be possible that the costs of pro-
cessing the order and delivering the goods or services may be greater than the value of the
purchase. The process cost to transact a $50 purchase may be as much as a $5,000 one. The
goal is to minimize the acquisition costs (the process costs not the price) of nonstrategic
spend while assuring availability.
The problem of small monetary value orders is resolved by simplifying or automating
the process or consolidating purchases to reduce the acquisition cycle time (time from
need recognition to payment), reduce administrative cost, and free up the buyer’s time for
higher-value or more critical purchases. A few examples follow:
1. Vendor/supplier-managed inventory (VMI/SMI), stockless buying, or systems con-
tracting can be used. This is typical for MRO items. (See explanation earlier in this
chapter.)
2. A procurement card (also called a purchasing card or a P-card) is a credit card that is
provided to internal customers to purchase directly from established suppliers. (See
discussion in next section.)
3. Supply sets up blanket orders against which internal customers issue release orders;
suppliers provide summary billing.
4. An electronic procurement or an electronic data interchange (EDI) system is used.
Ordering and reordering occur automatically based on preestablished reorder points.
5. In reverse auctions, the buyer prequalifies suppliers and invites them to an online
auction during which bidders submit bids and the buyer awards a contract for the
predefined items for a set period of time.
6. Authority levels and bidding practices are adjusted, and an e-procurement system,
telephone, or e-mail is used for ordering.
7. Integrated suppliers are used to provide a variety of supplies.
8. Low-value order placement is outsourced to third parties.
9. Persuasion may be employed to increase the number of standardized items requested.
10. Small requisitions are held until a reasonable total, in dollars, has been accumulated.
11. Specific supplies or type of supplier is assigned to a requisition calendar so that all
requests are received on the same day.
12. Invoice-less payments (self-billing) are arranged.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 92joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 92 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 93
13. Users place orders directly with suppliers.
14. A blank check purchase order is issued in which a signed, blank check is sent along
with the PO. The supplier ships the full order, completes the check, and deposits it.
This reduces paperwork (receiving reports, inventory entries, and payments), saves
postage, often enables a larger cash discount, and saves time in accounts payable.
15. Outsource responsibility for small-value purchases to a third-party purchasing ser-
vices provider. For example, some firms prefer to use third-party firms to handle their
plant stores’ operations for MRO components.
Reducing the Number of Requisitions Marked Rush or EmergencyFrequently, an excessive number of requisitions are marked “rush.” Emergencies, such as
style or design changes, equipment breakdowns, and unexpected changes in market condi-
tions, may justify a rush order.
However, some “rush” orders cannot be justifi ed. These include requisitions caused
by: (1) faulty inventory control, (2) poor production planning or budgeting, (3) lack of
confi dence in the ability of the supply department to get material to the user by the proper
time, and (4) the sheer habit of marking requests “rush.” Unnecessary costs occur because
of errors from working under pressure and the impact on price to compensate the supplier
for the added burden (real or perceived) of a rush order.
Education and process improvements may reduce the problem. Supply must educate
users about the proper supply procedure and enlist the support of other functions to gain
compliance. For example, the requisitioner has to secure approval from the general man-
ager and any extra costs that can be calculated are charged back.
Improvements in process effi ciency increase the credibility of the process and the sup-
ply group. These include preapproved suppliers, purchasing cards, electronic catalogs, and
e-procurement systems that reduce lead and cycle time and allow users to issue requests
directly to a supplier against an existing contract.
Corporate Purchasing CardsCorporate purchasing cards (also called procurement cards or P-cards) are credit cards issued
to internal customers (users) in the buying organization to purchase low-dollar-value, high-
volume goods and services. P-cards reduce administrative costs (for people, system use and
third-party providers) by reducing the number of purchase orders generated and processed
and by shortening the process cycle time for authorizing, tracking, purchasing, reconciling,
and reporting purchases. P-card use supports other process initiatives such as consolidating
spend and suppliers. They can be merged with technology to be electronic commerce compat-
ible and data sensitive to capture information that is integrated into an ERP system.
Holders of the card are given dollar limits and lists of preferred suppliers with whom
supply has already negotiated prices and terms. P-cards automate many aspects of the sys-
tem, thereby eliminating purchase orders and individual invoices and ensuring suppliers of
fast payment, two or three days versus 30+ in a typical system. By moving the transaction
activities to the user department, the supply cycle time and transaction costs are reduced.
Also, buyers (and accounts payable) are freed from the day-to-day transactions for small-
value purchases and can focus on higher-value purchases and issues.
The General Services Administration (GSA) found that purchases under $2,500 ac-
counted for approximately 2 percent of total federal government spending, but represented
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 93joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 93 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
94 Purchasing and Supply Management
85 percent of total procurement transaction volume. Implementation of purchasing cards
to handle low-value purchases generated estimated savings of $54 to $92 per transaction
while simultaneously reducing the time required to process paperwork transactions by two
to six weeks.1
The primary perceived risk of P-cards is loss of control. Card issuers have instituted
controls that (1) determine, at the point of sale, if the purchase meets preset dollar limits per
card; (2) limit the number of transactions per day; (3) limit the value of a single transaction;
(4) determine if it is an approved supplier; and (5) limit purchases to specifi c commodities.
By establishing daily and monthly querying and reporting, the administrator manages by
exception rather than focusing on monthly statement details.
The most sophisticated card programs are able to (1) track and report sales tax information
for audit purposes, (2) track and prepare 1099 forms for unincorporated service providers,
(3) identify whether the supplier is a minority business owner, (4) capture specifi c product
information, (5) identify which cost center should be charged for the purchase, and (6) include
different types of purchases, including travel and entertainment expenses and fl eet expenses.
Supplier- or Vendor-Managed Inventory (SMI/VMI), Stockless Buying, or Systems ContractingSupplier- or vendor-managed inventory (SMI/VMI), systems contracting, or stockless buying
are a more sophisticated merging of the ordering and inventory functions than blanket contracts.
Systems ContractingSystems contracts rely on periodic billing procedures, allow nonsupply personnel to issue
order releases, employ special catalogs, and require suppliers to maintain minimum inven-
tory levels. Normally, the volume of contract items is not specifi ed. These systems improve
inventory turnover rates.
This technique is used most frequently in buying repetitive items such as offi ce supplies
and maintenance, repair, and operating supplies (MRO). MRO supplies are many types of
items, all of comparatively low value and needed immediately when any kind of a plant
or equipment failure occurs. The technique is built around a blanket-type contract that is
developed in great detail regarding approximate quantities to be used in specifi ed time
periods, prices, provisions for adjusting prices, procedures to be followed for daily requisi-
tioning and delivery within a short time (normally 24 hours), simplifi ed billing procedures,
and a complete catalog (often online) of all items covered by the contract.
In an electronic procurement system, the buyer or requisitioner communicates electroni-
cally each item and quantity required. If there are large-volume requirements from a specifi c
supplier, the supplier stores items in the customer’s plant as though it were the supplier’s
warehouse. The buyer’s contact with the supplier is electronic. The system works as follows:
1. The buyer places the blanket order for a family of items, such as fasteners, at firm prices.
2. The supplier delivers predetermined quantities to the inventory area set aside in the
buyer’s plant. The items are still owned by the supplier.
3. The buyer sometimes inspects the items when they are delivered.
4. The computer directs storage to the appropriate bin or shelf.
1 R. J. Palmer, M. Gupta, and R. Dawson, “U.S. Government Use of Card Technology,” Defense Acquisition University (July 2010), www.dau.mil.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 94joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 94 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 95
5. The buyer places POs electronically, thus relieving the supplier’s inventory records.
6. Pick sheets are prepared and the items are picked from the supplier’s inventory.
7. The supplier submits a single invoice monthly for all items picked.
8. The buyer’s accounting department makes a single monthly payment.
9. A summary report is electronically generated, at predetermined intervals, showing the
items and quantity used for the buyer’s and supplier’s analysis, planning, and restocking.
Systems contracting is used in service organizations as well as manufacturing and for
high-dollar-volume commodities as well as MRO supplies. The shorter cycle time from
requisition to delivery leads to substantial inventory reductions and greater compliance with
the supply process. The amount of red tape or bureaucracy is minimal. Since the user nor-
mally provides a good estimate of requirements and compensates the supplier in case the
forecast is not good, the supplier risks little in inventory investment. The degree of coopera-
tion and information exchange required between buyer and supplier often results in stronger
relationships than normally exhibited in a traditional arm’s-length trading situation.
Vendor- or Supplier-Managed Inventory (VMI or SMI) In VMI systems, the supplier is responsible for maintaining the buying organization’s inven-
tory levels. The supplier has access to inventory levels (often electronically) and generates
purchase orders. Typically, the supplier manages the buyer’s inventory at the buyer’s location.
The supplier pulls stock, packs, ships, and invoices. This procedure reduces process
cycle time by reducing the number of people/functions touching the process. These sys-
tems are tools for managing small orders. VMI may also be used for consignment inven-
tory wherein payment is made after inventory is used.
Large retailers, such as Walmart, use VMI systems with their key suppliers such as
Procter & Gamble. In these arrangements, stock at Walmart’s distribution centers is owned
by the supplier and invoices are issued when the goods are shipped to a store. EDI is used
to handle inventory reconciliation and invoicing.
INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND THE SUPPLY PROCESS
Information systems include interconnected components that collect, process, and store
raw data and distribute information to support decision making, control, and coordination
within the organization. While information systems can be manual (paper based), most
information systems rely on information technology infrastructure, consisting of hardware
and software, to operate.
Information system technology allows organizations to be connected with important
partners in their supply chain networks. Capabilities to exchange reliable information with
these partners quickly and cost effectively is essential for the improvement of supply chain
performance.
There are a number of technology tools available to improve process effi ciency and ef-
fectiveness. These tools enable process effectiveness in two ways: (1) They make data more
transparent, accurate, and accessible to decision makers, and (2) they relieve supply deci-
sion makers of lower- value-adding tasks, allowing them to focus on higher-value- adding
tasks, spend categories, and internal (other functional areas, top management) and external
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 95joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 95 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
96 Purchasing and Supply Management
(suppliers) relationships. Also, the development of decision support and knowledge man-
agement systems enables more sophisticated modeling and facilitates more complex deci-
sions involving multiple variables.
To determine which information systems might be used to support or enable effi cient
and effective processes, it is important to understand (1) the benefi ts of the technology,
(2) the technology options that provide these benefi ts, and (3) the trade-offs in costs and
benefi ts when choosing technology.
This section covers information systems in a supply context, and addresses the following:
ERP systems, cloud computing, e-procurement, online catalogs, electronic data interchange
(EDI), marketplaces, online reverse auctions, and radio frequency identifi cation (RFID).
Benefi ts of Information Systems TechnologyInformation system technology can provide seven important benefi ts to the organization:
Cost reduction and effi ciency gains. These can be achieved by streamlining the sup-
ply processes and freeing up supply staff to do more value-adding work.
Data accessibility. Quick and easy access to critical data in real time aids sound deci-
sion making, makes it easier to identify supply problems earlier, and provides useful
information for negotiations.
Speedier communication. Faster communication improves supply chain effectiveness
and effi ciency, especially with global suppliers. Faster turnaround may increase market
share and lower inventories.
Dedicate resources to strategic issues. More resources (e.g., staff and budgets) can be
spent on strategic supply initiatives, and strategic and critical suppliers and projects
because less time is spent on administrative and tactical supply activities.
Data accuracy. Automation decreases errors, especially data entry errors. Benefi ts
include lower inventories (safety stock) and stockouts, lower expediting costs, and
improved customer satisfaction.
Systems integration. Integration across departments, suppliers, and customers can
provide accurate information on a timely basis to assist with production and materials
planning and decision making.
Monetary control. Enterprise systems can provide control over how and where money
is spent.
ERP SystemsEnterprise resource planning (ERP) systems refer to a type of computer software that con-
tains a suite of applications that integrate various functions within the organization (e.g.,
operations, supply, marketing, and accounting/fi nance) and facilitates the connection to
supply chain stakeholders, such as suppliers and customers. Using a common data man-
agement system, ERP systems allow users to share information across departments, and in
some cases across the supply chain, in real time. An additional advantage of ERP is that
it eliminates dispersed organizational information systems, thereby reducing opportunities
for errors in transaction processes.
ERP represents an extension of standalone MRP (materials requirements planning and
later materials resource planning) systems that became popular in the late 1980s and 1990s
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 96joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 96 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 97
and focused originally on manufacturing fi rms (see Chapter 8 for a detailed coverage of
MRP). Today, ERP systems are used by fi rms in the manufacturing, services, governmen-
tal, and nonprofi t sectors. While SAP AG and Oracle are the largest providers of ERP
software, there are a large number of small ERP solutions suppliers, typically targeting
specifi c industry sectors.
Most organizations have supply chain management modules as part of their ERP sys-
tems. These can include purchasing, forecasting and planning, order tracking, shipping and
receiving, scheduling, and inventory management.
The cost of ERP systems and implementation can be expensive and disruptive to the
organization. For large organizations, total costs can run in the tens of millions of dollars,
take several years, and involve hundreds of consultants and project managers. Many small
and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) cannot afford the capital outlay of ERP software
and may instead adopt cloud-based systems that offer the cost advantage of pay-as-you-go
fees as opposed to up-front capital costs (see the following section on cloud computing).
Business processes used to support company legacy systems can evolve over time and be-
come ineffi cient. Implementation of ERP systems requires evaluation of and changes to busi-
ness processes. As with most projects, poor preparation is a leading cause of failure, so proper
understanding of how processes are currently used and the changes required is the essential
starting point for ERP system implementation. This can be particularly challenging in a decen-
tralized organization that may have very different processes and policies. Reviewing business
processes as part of an ERP implementation project represents an opportunity to improve pro-
cess effi ciency and standardize and align processes across the organization.
The signifi cant costs and effort required to implement ERP systems are justifi ed on the
basis of eliminating the costs of maintaining legacy systems; operating effi ciencies in areas
such as inventory control and customer service levels as a result of systems integration;
improved visibility, and the ability to make decisions quickly using real-time information;
standardization of processes and policies (e.g., product coding); improved order tracking;
and access to a common database that can be used for analytics.
Adopting ERP systems also comes with potential disadvantages beyond cost and orga-
nizational effort to implement and train employees on the new system. It is diffi cult to cus-
tomize ERP systems, and companies may have to change or forego unique processes. Once
fi rms commit to an ERP system, switching costs are high. Fees to support the system and up-
grade costs can be expensive and, where possible, should be negotiated at the outset. Lastly,
the anticipated benefi ts can be overestimated, extending the payback on the investment.
Cloud Computing and the Supply ChainIt is common for organizations to install new software applications layered over existing
legacy systems. For supply, examples include procurement, inventory management, trans-
portation, and forecasting systems provided by companies such as Descartes, JDA, and
Manhattan Associates. Cloud solutions provide access to software applications, in some
cases working on top of legacy systems, which provides the advantages of cost-effectiveness
and fl exibility.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) defi nes cloud computing as
“a model for enabling ubiquitous, convenient, on-demand network access to a shared pool
of confi gurable computing resources (e.g., networks, servers, storage, applications, and
services) that can be rapidly provisioned and released with minimal management effort
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 97joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 97 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
98 Purchasing and Supply Management
or service provider interaction.”2 Cloud computing can be private (operated for a single
organization, managed internally or by a third party), public (operated over a network for
general public use), community (operated for specifi c organizations, managed internally
or by a third party), or hybrid (some combination of private, community, and/or public).
Individuals are exposed to cloud applications in their personal lives in a variety of common
technologies, such as accessing e-mail through Gmail, managing their music library on iTunes,
or using some operating systems, such as Microsoft Offi ce 365, on their computers.
There are three main elements of cloud computing important to supply:3
Software as a Service (SaaS): Applications that reside in the cloud, which users are
able to rent on a pay-for-use basis. SaaS is the largest and most mature part of cloud
computing.
Platform as a Service (PaaS): Software development technologies that allow users to
create customized processes or tools specifi c for their needs.
Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS): Shared server capacity that permits the sharing of
computing power and storage and that can be accessed as needed on a pay-for-use basis.
Advocates of cloud solutions claim that it provides the advantages of lower costs and
increased fl exibility. First, IaaS means that the costs of cloud computing are variable, based
on a pay-as-you-go model, so organizations are able to avoid expensive capital investments
in new systems. Second, PaaS permits implementation of cloud-based systems easier and
faster. Proponents of cloud systems claim that new applications can be set up faster, with less
ongoing maintenance, permitting allocation of information technology resources to other
areas. Third, the interconnectedness of cloud computing provided by SaaS improves trans-
parency and visibility across the end-to-end supply chain. Communication and workfl ows
are more reliable and robust, compared to traditional methods such as e-mail and EDI.
Adaption of cloud-based systems is expected to continue to grow rapidly. Estimates for
the market size of cloud technology are $150 to $200 billion by 2020.4 However, skeptics
of cloud computing have raised concerns in the areas of cost, reliability, security, and
regulation. Despite claims of the cost advantages of cloud computing, careful analysis is
required to understand the fee structure and compare it to the costs of acquiring the appli-
cation and hosting it internally. Similarly, there are concerns that some cloud applications
are not as reliable and managed as well as on-premises infrastructure, resulting in service
interruptions. Security is a major issue with most information systems, and the concept of
third-party managed infrastructure can be unsettling. Concerns include hackers that can
compromise data security, service providers using data without permission, and vulnerabil-
ity to viruses, worms, and malware. There are a number of regulatory issues, mainly related
to data transport and access, especially in cases where data storage and infrastructure are
hosted in a foreign country. Government regulations are vague in some areas and are ex-
pected to change and evolve. For now, users should get as much clarity as possible about
the legal and regulatory issues for their organization before adopting cloud computing.5
2 Reference: http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-145/SP800-145.pdf, accessed February 27, 2014.3 G. Courtin, Supply Chain and the Future of Applications (London, U.K.: SCM World, October, 2013).4 http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-145/SP800-145.5 A. McAfee, “What Every CEO Needs to Know About the Cloud,” Harvard Business Review 89, no. 11 (November 2011), pp. 124–132.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 98joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 98 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 99
Electronic Procurement SystemsE-procurement is an applications software package that allows the requisitioning, authoriz-
ing, ordering, receiving, invoicing, and paying for goods and services through the Internet
and is frequently a module in the company’s ERP system. Firms such as Oracle and SAP
dominate the e-procurement market because their software can provide real-time integra-
tion with their ERP systems. Because of the costs of acquiring ERP and e-procurement
systems, many small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) use cloud computing services,
enabled by SaaS, to acquire e-procurement capabilities.
Some organizations use e-procurement to automate from requisition-to-order and others
from requisition-to-pay. An end-to-end e-procurement system that includes contracts and
e-payables in the cycle is referred to as procure-to-pay.
The adoption of an e-procurement system is often driven by existing process ineffi -
ciency, low internal compliance, high transaction costs, low spend visibility, and low con-
trol over organizational spend. Performance metrics for an e-procurement system often
include: (1) the percent of organizational spend under supply’s control, (2) requisition-
to-order costs, (3) requisition-to-order cycles, and (4) percent of off-contract (maverick)
spend. A survey of chief purchasing offi cers about their use of e-procurement technology
found the benefi ts were: (1) better visibility of what they are spending globally by supplier,
region, and commodity, (2) faster, better product development by tapping suppliers as an
innovation source, and (3) tighter risk reduction and mitigation.6
From the internal user/customer perspective, a successful e-procurement system is one
that makes life easier—faster ordering, faster fulfi llment, and a broader range of choices.
Depending on the policies and procedures implemented, it may be possible to satisfy in-
ternal users as well as meet the requirements for internal control, cost savings, and supply
base management.
Streamlining the Receiving, Invoicing, and Payment Process Should the e-procurement system include receiving, invoicing, and payment? A valid
question is: Does the organization need to receive an invoice? The invoice provides no
new information, yet it costs money to handle.
In an invoiceless system, suppliers are notifi ed that payment, based on the agreed-upon
cash discount schedule, will be made in a set number of days from receipt of satisfactory
merchandise (and they may specify that payment will be made only after the complete
shipment has been received). A system match between the PO, receiving report, and in-
spection report (if conducted) is made, and a check is generated or funds are electronically
transmitted on the receipt date at the agreed-upon payment term. The receiving report must
be accurate; the PO fully priced, including taxes and cash discount terms; and purchases
must be made FOB destination, since there is no way to enter in freight charges. The PO
then is the controlling document.
Commodity Coding SchemaCommodity managers need commodity codes to effectively source, track, and manage
spend by category. Users, who want to get to the product quickly and easily, need robust
6 D. Jones, “Best Practices: Selecting and Implementing ePurchasing Products,” Forrester Research (May 22, 2013).
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 99joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 99 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
100 Purchasing and Supply Management
item descriptions that are easily searched. The procurement team must respond to the needs
of both stakeholders.
The value of a hierarchical commodity coding schema is the ability to evaluate expen-
ditures according to any level of the hierarchy. If a company, such as an architectural,
graphic arts, or printing fi rm, spends a signifi cant amount on writing utensils and supplies,
spend analysis may be at the class (ink and lead refi lls) or commodity (pen refi lls) levels.
This reveals opportunities to consolidate suppliers, fi nd better sources, negotiate volume
discounts, or optimize the supply chain in some other way. If this spend is insignifi cant,
analysis may be on the higher family (offi ce supplies) or segment (offi ce equipment, ac-
cessories, and supplies) categories only.
The U.N. Standard Products and Services Code (UNSPSC) provides an open, global,
multisector standard for effi cient, accurate classifi cation of products and services. Some
supply managers are dissatisfi ed because the UNSPSC often does not address specifi c in-
dustries or products at a level of detail required for meaningful commodity spend analysis.
Also, it is diffi cult to make updates in an automated environment. Different divisions of
the same organization often assign different UNSPSC codes to the same commodity. To
effectively use UNSPSC, all databases within an organization and its supply chain need to
use the same version of UNSPSC, support backward compatibility for earlier versions, and
keep it updated. Costs can be prohibitive.
Many procurement departments use government-issued, industry-specifi c, or propri-
etary code systems that do not directly integrate or embed UNSPSC. Proprietary codes are
developed by, and useful to, a single company. Often they are not hierarchical, meaning
they lack roll-up and drill-down capabilities for spend analysis. Such coding schemas can
be expensive to develop and maintain, and it can be expensive to require trading partners
to use the same code.7
Electronic or Online Catalogs An e-catalog or online catalog is a digitized version of a supplier’s catalog. It allows
buyers to use a web browser to view detailed buying and specifying information about
the supplier’s products and/or services. Product catalogs include (1) product specifi cation
data, and (2) transaction data. Product specifi cation data describe the products and are the
same for all buyers. Transaction data (price, shipping and billing addresses, and quantity
discounts) are customized to each buyer.
Suppliers have a number of options to digitize their catalogs. The buyer’s solutions
provider can typically convert the supplier’s catalog to a suitable format. Alternatively,
the supplier can purchase an out-of-the box software package and make the conversion or
purchase the services of the software provider. Or a data aggregator can develop a library
of product specifi cations from a variety of suppliers and license organizations to use the
product specifi cations and assist in developing the transaction data. In a catalog network, a
host company collects the catalogs and customizes the transaction data for each buyer. The
buyer can either pull the catalogs onto the company server or access them from the host
company. Or the supplier may allow the buyer to “punch out” or access a supplier-hosted
catalog.
7 A. E. Flynn, Catalog Management: Implementation Strategies (Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research, October 2004).
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 100joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 100 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 101
Supply can create buyer-controlled catalogs that combine information, such as pric-
ing and specifi cations, from one or multiple suppliers. Simple database software packages
permit the creation of such catalogs, and most enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems
have features that permit the creation of customized catalogs. The supplier is responsible
for updating and maintaining the catalogs.
In-house catalogs permit the user to customize content in terms of supply options and
pricing, or to restrict supply options. These catalogs support item standardization and vol-
ume purchasing from approved suppliers. The catalog can be integrated into the company’s
system to streamline the process and track spending patterns.
EDIEDI has been in existence since the 1960s, but it did not receive widespread attention and
adoption until the 1990s. EDI allows computer-to-computer exchange of business docu-
ments between two organizations using agreed standards to structure the message data.
The sender converts documents from their application format to a standard EDI message
format and transmits the message either directly or through a third party. EDI involves
B2B transactions only—individual consumers do not use EDI to purchase goods or ser-
vices. Documents commonly exchanged via EDI include purchase orders, shipping sched-
ules and notifi cations, and invoices. EDI has been widely adopted in the manufacturing,
transportation, and retailing sectors. Companies such as Walmart, General Motors, Home
Depot, and Target require supplier compliance with EDI.
EDI provides secure transmission and fast turnaround of large amounts of data; greater
accuracy internally and with trading partners; shorter process cycle time that may help to
lower inventory, provide electronic logs or audit trails, and reduce administrative costs.
EDI requires the use of standard message formats, which vary depending on industry
and method of transmission. The most popular are ANSI X12, which is commonly used
in North America, and UN/EDIFACT, which is widely used outside of North America.
Certain variations of formats are used in specifi c industries, such as the Uniform Com-
mercial Standard (UCS) in grocery and retail, and the Voluntary Inter-Industry Commerce
Standards (VICS) in consumer packaged goods.
Value-added networks (VANS) are third-party organizations that provide EDI services
for a fee. The primary services provided by VANS are transmitting information and provid-
ing data storage, similar to e-mail boxes. VANS are frequently used by small and medium-
sized organizations that do not have EDI software capability in-house. Companies may also
join VANS because of a requirement by one or more trading partners.
Increasingly, EDI transmissions are sent via the Internet, sometimes allowing organiza-
tions to bypass VANS, but some organizations still use data transmission lines. Using EDI
over the Internet has meant that some fi rms have adopted AS1 and AS2 protocols that rely
on XML, SMTP, and HTTP/HTTPS to send documents as S/MINE attachments, allowing
them to bypass VANS.
The established B2B networks and systems provided by EDI, which has become the stan-
dard in many industries, means that EDI will continue to play an important role in the fore-
seeable future. The volume of EDI transactions continues to grow annually and the volume of
global EDI transactions is estimated at 20 billion per year. However, fi rms are expanding the
number of B2B communication methods and message formats. B2B marketplaces, described
in the following section, provide an alternative to EDI.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 101joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 101 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
102 Purchasing and Supply Management
MarketplacesAn extranet is a private intranet that is extended to authorized users outside the company,
such as suppliers, also referred to as private marketplaces. Private marketplaces improve
supply chain coordination and information sharing with key business partners. Through
a web-based interface, suppliers can link into a customer’s systems, and vice versa, to
perform any number of activities, such as checking inventory levels, tracking the status
of invoices, or submitting quotes. Because the information exchange is electronic, supply
professionals are freed to spend time on value-added activities rather than entering data
or checking the status of shipments or payments. The largest and perhaps most successful
example of a private marketplace is Walmart’s RetailLink.
Unlike B2C marketplaces such as eBay, Amazon, and Alibaba, public B2B market-
places that developed in the early 2000s have, for the most part, disappeared or changed
their business model. These marketplaces were in two groups: independent and consortia.
Examples include FreeMarkets (independent marketplace providing reverse auction ser-
vices) and Quadrem (consortia marketplace in the mining industry). A handful of public
marketplaces have survived, such as the health care marketplace Global Health Exchange
(GHX).
In contrast to a private marketplace, an intranet is a single and widely accessible (for au-
thorized users only) network set up to share information and communicate with company
employees. It is a private, secure internal Internet. Intranets communicate information and
facilitate collaboration among employees and are sometimes linked to the company’s ERP
system. They can be used to display supplier catalogs, provide lists of approved suppliers,
and post company supply policies. Supply processes can be enhanced by allowing em-
ployees to place orders via web browsers, approve and confi rm purchases electronically,
and generate POs electronically. The main advantages of supply-based intranets are low
transaction costs and reduced lead times.
Online Reverse AuctionsAuctions have been used for commercial transactions for centuries. Generally, auctions
are classifi ed on the basis of competition, between sellers or buyers, and forward or de-
scending prices. For example, the Dutch fl ower auctions are declining-price auctions with
competition between buyers, while a traditional English-style auction, involving the sale
of equipment or furniture, is a rising-price auction with multiple buyers. These models and
the Internet provide new techniques for determining price, quality, volume allocations, and
delivery schedules with suppliers.
Internet auction events can be open offer, private offer, posted prices, and reverse
auctions.
Open Offer Auctions Suppliers select items, see the most competitive offers from other
suppliers, and enter as many offers as they want up until a specifi ed closing time.
Private Offer Auctions The buyer offers a target price and quantity. Suppliers enter
offer(s) on select item(s) by a specifi c time. The buyer evaluates and posts a “status.” The
status levels are:
Accepted: The supplier is awarded the contract, contingent on fi nal qualifi cation.
Closed: The supplier may no longer submit offers on the item.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 102joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 102 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 103
BAFO (best and fi nal offer): The supplier may submit one more offer for the item.
Open: Bidding may be continued for as many rounds as necessary to accept or close all
items.
Posted Price Auctions The buyer posts the acceptable price; the fi rst supplier to meet it
gets the award.
Reverse AuctionsA reverse auction is an online, real-time, dynamic, declining-price auction for goods or
services between one buying organization and a group of prequalifi ed suppliers. Suppliers
compete by bidding against each other online using specialized software. Suppliers see the
status of their bids in real time. The supplier with the lowest bid or lowest total cost bid is
usually awarded the business.
When to Use Reverse AuctionsA reverse auction is an alternative sourcing method to RFPs/RFQs, sealed bids, face-to-
face negotiations, and spot buys from the commodity markets. At a minimum, the follow-
ing conditions are required:
1. Clearly defined specifications, including technological, logistical, and commercial
requirements.
2. A competitive market with qualified suppliers willing to participate. Typically, at least
three suppliers are required. More than six suppliers may add unnecessary costs and
complexity.
3. An understanding of the market conditions in order to set appropriate expectations for
a reserve price.
4. Buyer and seller familiarity and competency using the auction technology.
5. Clear rules of conduct: for example, conditions for extending auction length and award
criteria.
6. The buyer is prepared to switch suppliers if necessary.
7. The buyer believes that the projected savings justify a reverse auction.
Conducting Reverse Auction EventsThere are three stages: preparation, the auction event, and implementation and follow-up.
Preparation The purchaser identifi es or certifi es appropriate suppliers; sets the quality,
quantity, delivery, and service requirements and length of contract; trains internal team
members and supplier representatives on the auction technology; tests the technology and
communicates the process and award criteria.
Event Price visibility can be handled by showing rank order, percentage, or proportional
differences. Bid ranks can be adjusted for nonprice factors, such as differences in transpor-
tation costs or quality.
Auction rules should be known up-front and strictly followed to foster credibility and
encourage future participation. Suppliers must know the length of the auction and the rules
for extending the time period. Suppliers and the buyer can typically communicate during
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 103joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 103 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
104 Purchasing and Supply Management
the auction. Messages may or may not be visible to other participants. Technical assistance
should also be available.
Implementation and Follow-Up The purchaser announces the results to participants and re-
sponds to questions. Negotiation or clarifi cation may occur before the fi nal contract is signed.
The auction leader communicates the outcome internally. For example, accounting
needs to know if there is a change of suppliers and/or pricing. Anything that might improve
auctions should be documented.
Issues with Reverse AuctionsPotential ethical transgressions on behalf of buyers are:
1. Buyer knowingly accepts bids from suppliers with unreasonably low prices.
2. Buying firm submits phantom bids during the event to increase the competition artificially.
3. Buyer includes unqualified suppliers to increase price competition.
Potential ethical issues involving suppliers are:
1. Supplier collusion.
2. Suppliers bid unrealistically low prices and attempt to renegotiate afterwards.
3. Suppliers “bird watch” or participate in the event but do not bid to collect market intel-
ligence. A rule requiring bids before entering the auction may preclude this behavior.
4. Suppliers submit bids after the auction event in an attempt to secure the business.
Potential Problems with Using Online Auctions8
There are a number of problems that might arise. These include:
• The risk of interrupting good supplier relationships.
• The risk of developing a reputation for aggressive price-buying over other considerations.
• The costs of running the auction versus expected savings.
• The cost savings potential of auctions versus sourcing processes such as RFP/RFQ and
negotiation.
• Signifi cant up-front preparation and cost required compared to determining price
through an RFP/RFQ.
• Actual price when unforeseen costs are factored in versus bid price.
The Portland Bus Company at the end of this chapter provides an example of a company
that uses electronic reverse auctions and the implications for making sourcing decisions.
Radio Frequency Identifi cation (RFID)RFID tags contain a chip and antenna that emit a signal, using energy from a radio fre-
quency reader, which contains information about the container or its individual contents.
RFID tags can be passive, active, or battery-assisted passive and vary widely in memory,
frequency, power source, and cost. The most common are passive, read-only tags.
RFID technology has many applications in everyday life, such as employee identifi ca-
tion badges and highway toll payment devices. Three primary applications of RFID in
8 P. F. Johnson, “Supply Organizational Structures,” CAPS Research, June 2003.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 104joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 104 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 105
the supply chain are real-time tracking of inventory, product tracking, and transportation.
RFID can track the movement of inventory through the supply chain. For example, it can
show inventory levels in the warehouse. Several industries use RFID to track product
through the manufacturing process. Automotive manufacturers use RFID tags to manage
the assembly of cars, coordinating the delivery of the proper components, such as seats
and engines, to the assembly line. Transportation service providers use RFID technol-
ogy to track rolling stock and coordinate maintenance schedules. The potential benefi ts
of RFID in the supply chain include lower costs by the elimination of manual counting
and bar coding of incoming and outgoing material; automatic tracking of inventory levels;
faster, easier, and more accurate inventory identifi cation and picking; and reduced spoilage
through improved stock rotation.
RFID is not without drawbacks. First, it adds another level of information and the fi rm’s
information systems must have the capability to capture, process, and analyze the data as
they are collected. Problems persist with the ability to capture reliable data collected by
the readers. Second, implementation requires investments in information technology and
equipment, and support is required from consultants and systems engineers. Although the
costs of RFID tags have decreased, they still remain relatively expensive compared to other
technology alternatives (e.g., bar codes). As a result, many fi rms do not feel that adopting
the technology provides a reasonable return on investment. Third, concerns have been
raised about security during data transmission and privacy issues for consumers.
IMPLICATIONS FOR SUPPLY
When applying technology to the acquisition process, supply professionals still play a criti-
cal decision-making role. They provide the investigative and analytical skills to source,
evaluate, and select suppliers; the infl uencing and persuading skills to negotiate the best
deal for the organization; and a strategic and long-term planning approach to anticipate and
prevent problems down the road. The transactional side is streamlined and responsibility
for actually placing orders delegated to the user whenever possible.
With rapidly changing technology, it is diffi cult to predict what the future will look like.
It is, therefore, important to identify the key questions that decision makers in supply man-
agement must answer before embarking on an e-commerce path. These include:
1. Should we be a leader or a follower?
2. What should be acquired through e-commerce?
3. What tools should we use to acquire those items?
4. Who should we use as a service provider?
1. Should we be a leader or a follower? Management must decide to be an early adopter
of new technology or wait to see what emerges as the norm or standard. Early adopt-
ers often report that, despite the difficulties encountered, there are advantages to being
further along than later adopters. Those who choose to wait tend to believe that the high
risks and costs associated with adopting new technology in its infancy far outweighs
whatever competitive advantages might be gained. Relevant factors are the organiza-
tion’s risk aversion and success with past technology implementation.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 105joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 105 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
106 Purchasing and Supply Management
2. What should be acquired through e-commerce? Should the organization purchase
indirect goods and services, direct requirements, or both through e-commerce tools,
strategic or nonstrategic goods and services? Supply managers must consider the char-
acteristics of each category of purchase (see Chapter 6 for a discussion of purchases
categories) to determine what might be successfully procured online. This analysis
includes consideration of the existing and desired buyer–supplier relationship to ensure
that the method of procurement does not adversely harm the relationship.
3. What tools should we use? Streamlining tools range from lower technology tools, such as
procurement cards, to high-technology tools, such as online reverse auctions, e-catalogs,
and integrated e-RFx systems. A decision to adopt e-commerce does not necessarily
mean that all the available tools will be adopted. The decision maker must determine
the appropriateness of the tool to the type of material or service under consideration, the
nature of the buyer-supplier relationship, and the comfort level of the internal stakehold-
ers and the suppliers. Decisions related to the adoption of enterprise systems (e.g., ERP
systems) are made by the CEO, usually with input from executive leaders such as the
CFO and CIO. Supply operates under the umbrella of the company’s management infor-
mation systems, which can affect the range of e-commerce applications available.
4. Who should we use as a service provider(s)? If a third-party service provider is used,
such as cloud computing, a careful assessment must be made of the available providers.
Several critical technical issues are compatibility with, or ease of migration from, existing
software; scalability (can it grow with your needs?); the supplier’s technical reputation
and experience with supply chain management; and expertise of the staff. Some of the key
considerations beyond the technical issues are the long-term viability of the provider, user-
friendliness of the software, fee structure, and service and support—offline and online.
POLICY AND PROCEDURE MANUAL
A policy and procedure manual may also contribute to the development of an effi cient and effec-
tive process. It is a carefully prepared, detailed statement of organization, duties of the various
personnel, and procedures and data systems (including illustrative forms used, fully explained).
A manual is essential for a well-conceived training program, internal transfers, and communi-
cation about the process with nonsupply colleagues. The requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley
Act add greater importance to internal controls, standardized processes, and consistent use.
The preparation process may reveal inconsistencies and discrepancies that lead to pro-
cess improvements. Careful advance planning of the coverage, emphasis, and arrangement
is essential. It should include a clear defi nition of the purposes of the manual and its uses.
Both purpose and use infl uence length, form, and content. A manual may cover only policy
or it may include a description of the organization and some level of description of proce-
dures. Current manuals and sample manuals from other organizations can serve as guides.
Department personnel and internal stakeholders such as design, engineering, marketing,
operations, and production should discuss and check the contents for errors and modi-
fi cations. The manual should refl ect the actual policy and procedures, or drive process
changes. The manual may be posted on the organization’s intranet and/or in loose-leaf
form. The chief executive offi cer may enhance credibility by writing a foreword defi ning
the supply department’s authority and endorsing its policy and procedures.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 106joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 106 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 107
Common topics are authority to requisition; competitive bidding; approved suppliers;
supplier contracts and commitments; authority to question specifi cations; purchases for
employees; gifts, blanket purchase orders; confi dential data; rush orders; supplier rela-
tions; lead times; determination of quantity to buy; over and short allowance procedure;
local purchases; capital equipment; personal service purchases; repair service purchases;
authority to select suppliers; confi rming orders; unpriced purchase orders; documentation
for purchase decisions; invoice clearance and payment, invoice discrepancies; freight bills;
change orders; samples; returned materials; disposal of scrap and surplus; determination of
price paid; small-order procedures; salesperson interviews; and reporting of data.
Conclusion The supply management process has come under increasing scrutiny because of (1) the
unrelenting focus on cost management, and (2) the realization that standardized processes
and internal and external integration can lead to competitive advantage. Robust processes
are the foundation of a successful supply organization.
As supply managers continue to transition to a more strategic role in many organiza-
tions they also will continue to test and apply new technologies to the supply process. The
future holds much promise for technology-enabled process improvements. The challenges
are great, but those who see the opportunity for cost reductions, faster cycle times, better
integration with key supply chain stakeholders, and improved communication flows will
continue to seek ways to use these new tools to their best advantage. Information systems
and information technology enable a supply organization to contribute efficiently and ef-
fectively to organizational goals and strategies. Without structured and disciplined supply
processes, technology expenditures may leave the organization with too many tools and
not enough integration or utilization.
1. Where in the supply process is there the greatest opportunity to add value and why?
2. What are the steps in a robust supply management process?
3. What contribution to supply efficiency might be effected through the use of (a) an
e-procurement system, (b) online catalogs, and (c) online reverse auctions?
4. What approaches, other than the standard supply procedure, might be used to mini-
mize the small-value-order problem?
5. When would you issue an RFQ rather than an RFP and why?
6. What records are needed for efficient operation of the supply function? How can data
collection throughout the process help or hurt buyer–supplier relationships?
7. What are the costs and benefits of follow-up and expediting? Are there opportunities
to reduce total cost of ownership at this stage of the process?
8. How can an e-procurement system reduce the problem of small orders? Rush orders?
9. When should you use reverse auctions to select a supplier?
10. What arguments would you use to convince a supplier to participate in a reverse auction?
11. How does the use of an e-procurement system change the nature of the skills and
knowledge required of supply management personnel?
12. What possible improvements in supply processes could technology offer in the future?
Questions for Review and Discussion
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 107joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 107 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Beall, S. et al. The Role of Reverse Auctions in Strategic Sourcing. Tempe, AZ: CAPS
Research, 2003.
Cegielski, C. G.; L. A. Jones-Farmer; Y. Wu; and B. T. Hazen. “Adoption of Cloud
Computing Technologies in Supply Chains: An Organizational Information Processing
Theory Approach.” International Journal of Logistics Management 23, no. 2 (2012),
pp. 184–211.
Digitally Integrating the Supply Base, CAPS Research Benchmarking Report, February
2014, www.capsresearch.org.
Flynn, A. E. “Raytheon’s Buyerless Tools.” Practix 6. Tempe, AZ: CAPS Research,
March 2003.
Giunipero, L.; E. Ramirez; and E. Swilley, “The Antecedents and Consequences of
E-Purchasing Tools in Supply Management.” Journal of Marketing Theory and Practice 20, no. 3 (2012), pp. 279–292.
Johnson, P. F. “Supply Organizational Structures.” Critical Issues Report. Tempe, AZ:
CAPS Research, June 2003.
Johnson, P. F., and R. D. Klassen. “e-Procurement,” MIT Sloan Management Review 46,
no. 2 (2005), pp. 7–10.
Johnson, P. F.; R. D. Klassen; M. R. Leenders; and A. Awaysheh. “Utilizing E-Business
Technologies in Supply Chains: The Impact of Firm Characteristics and Teams.”
Journal of Operations Management 25, no. 6 (2007), pp. 1255–1274.
McAfee, A., “What Every CEO Needs to Know About the Cloud.” Harvard Business Review 89, no. 11 (November 2011), pp. 124–132.
Yeniyurt, S.; S. Watson; C. R. Carter; and C. K. Stevens. “To Bid or Not to Bid: Drivers
of Bidding Behavior in Electronic Reverse Auctions.” Journal of Supply Chain Management 47, no. 1 (2011), pp. 60–72.
References
Alice Winter, working on a summer internship at Qmont
Mining, was trying to determine how the supply systems
for remote locations could be improved.
QMONT MININGQmont Mining, a major metals producer with headquarters
in Vancouver, British Columbia, had extensive holdings
all over the Canadian North. Supply management had been
completely decentralized until very recently. A consulting
study had recommended a move to more centralized sup-
ply management, including purchasing and logistics. The
purchasing and stores manager at Qmont’s largest mine
in British Columbia, Harry Davidson, had been asked to
pursue this idea and to make recommendations on poten-
tial improvements.Harry had hired Alice Winter, a college
student in logistics, to work as a summer intern to assist
him. Harry had said to Alice: “A good project for you to
work on is the way we handle supply for remote locations.
I suspect that we could do substantially better, but I really
don’t have any hard data.”
REMOTE LOCATIONSAlice found out that Qmont had 17 remote locations, ranging
from three small mines that had a buyer/storekeeper on site to
two mine start-ups, nine exploration sites, and three develop-
ment projects with a distance of 5,000 kilometers (km)9 be-
tween the farthest ones and 300 km between the closest ones.
Qmont made a distinction between exploration sites where
9 1 km 5 0.60 miles.
Case 4–1
Qmont Mining
108 Purchasing and Supply Management
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 108joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 108 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 109
the potential for ore was totally unproven to development
sites where the possibility of mineralization had been proved,
but where the extent of mineralization had to be determined.
Qmont used its own drilling crews at these two types of sites,
although most mining companies preferred to use contract
drillers. Qmont managers believed that for security, availabil-
ity, and cost reasons they needed full control and in-house
crews. Typically, at both exploration and development sites
an engineer or geologist would be in charge. All supplies for
these sites would be flown in by bush planes on floats or by
helicopters.
ACCOUNTING INFORMATIONAlice Winter decided to visit the accounting department at
Vancouver headquarters first to see what she could learn
about supply in remote locations. She found out that ac-
counting paid all invoices from suppliers who claimed to
have supplied a remote location even when no confirma-
tion of orders, deliveries, or receipts was available. This
occurred in about one-third of all invoices. The accountant
explained: “Getting suppliers to provide odd requirements
in a hurry and to get bush pilots to fly them in is a constant
hassle. The last thing we want to do is lose the goodwill of
these suppliers because we don’t have our records straight
and delay payments.”
DEVELOPMENT AND EXPLORATION SITE DATAAlice did get the chance to review the previous year’s
actual supplier invoices for three different sites (one
development and two exploration) over a four-month sum-
mer period. Communication between actual sites and sup-
pliers occurred in two main ways. Since site leaders were
in regular contact via satellite with head office personnel
in exploration or engineering, they frequently asked the
head office contacts to place specific orders for them. In
addition, it was common for remote site personnel to con-
tact suppliers directly and place orders. Moreover, when a
drill needed a quick replacement part, apparently it was not
unusual to place orders with several suppliers at the same
time in the hope that at least one would deliver quickly.
Drill and crew downtime was seen as very expensive.
The site accounting records showed that the total supply
spend for these three sites totaled about $1,850,000. Of this
total, approximately:
• $220,000 was for drilling equipment including drill bits
and rods.
• $120,000 for MRO suppliers.
• $420,000 for air transport covering seven different sup-
pliers, of which air transport of personnel in and out of
sites cost about $170,000.
• $180,000 for fuel.
• $80,000 for food.
Alice uncovered 22 instances of multiple deliveries of
the same item within days to the same site from different
suppliers and 12 instances of multiple deliveries of the same
item from the same supplier within a few days. There were
14 instances where the airfreight bill was at least 10 times
higher than the value of the item transported.
NEXT STEPSAfter several weeks of gathering this information, Alice
wondered what her next steps should be. One option would
be to gather similar information for all remote sites to get
a more complete picture and to extend the time period.
Another would be to get more specific about the details of
each order and each supplier. She knew that she would be
meeting with Harry Davidson in a few days to discuss her
progress and findings to date. She also expected Harry to
ask her what she believed she should do next.
Case 4–2
Eastern Pharmaceuticals Ltd.In the afternoon of September 12, Andrew Baines, assis-
tant purchasing manager at Eastern Pharmaceuticals Ltd.
(Eastern), was discussing the purchase of packaging mate-
rials and contract filling of tablet samples with a supplier’s
representative. When the details of the packaging purchase
order were finalized, Andrew told the sales representative,
John Cao, of Lucas Paper & Box Company (Lucas), that
he would send him the purchase order for the packaging
components and 25 percent of the contract filling. John
replied that Shannon Baily, of the marketing department,
had promised him 100 percent of the contract filling. “This
is the first I’ve heard of that,” snapped Andrew. “It’s not
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 109joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 109 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
110 Purchasing and Supply Management
marketing’s responsibility,” he continued, controlling his
temper, “to decide what percentages of contract filling a
particular supplier will get. Purchasing arranges the con-
tract filling with the suppliers that can give the best quality,
delivery, and price.”
John Cao, an experienced sales representative, remained
unperturbed. He replied that he had always dealt with both
marketing and purchasing and that sometimes purchasing
was not involved at all in the projects. He said that in this
case where both marketing and purchasing were involved,
he was just keeping purchasing informed of what marketing
wanted. Andrew closed the meeting by politely telling John
that he would have to clear up the situation between the two
departments. He told John that he would let him know how
much of the contract packaging Lucas would be getting.
Andrew Baines, his boss Matt Roberts, and a senior
buyer made up the total purchasing staff at Eastern. One
of Andrew’s responsibilities was to handle the purchase
of the marketing department’s requirements. He also act-
ed as liaison between the department and the production
planning, manufacturing, and packaging departments. In
recent weeks Andrew was finding the job more and more
frustrating.
EASTERN PHARMACEUTICALSLocated in Seattle, Washington, Eastern carried an exten-
sive line of prescription and nonprescription items that
were mostly manufactured in its own plant. The company
had approximately 15,000 drugstore customers plus hos-
pital and government accounts. Annual sales of close to
$150 million were handled by 50 sales representatives
from coast to coast. Although the nonprescription items,
known as over-the-counter (OTC) products, were promot-
ed directly to the drug stores, most business was generated
by convincing the doctors to prescribe Eastern’s products
for their patients. No selling or advertising was directed at
the consumer.
The company’s sales strategy was that Eastern sales
representatives would give samples to a doctor after get-
ting a verbal promise to prescribe. These samples would
be used to start the patient on an Eastern product, and
the doctor would write a prescription for the patient to
pick up at the drugstore. With a large number of similar
products on the market, it was a difficult marketing prob-
lem to keep Eastern’s brand name in the doctor’s mind
days or weeks after the sales representative’s visit. To
help solve this problem, sales representatives asked the
doctors to sign forms requesting additional samples at
specific intervals.
The sales and marketing department had been recently
reorganized, and the two new people, Shannon Bailey,
sales promotion manager, and John Slaughter, advertising
manager, were understandably anxious to do a good job.
Both had made a lot of progress in working with John Cao,
standardizing the samples to be used for sales promotions
and advertising mailings. Essentially, both samples were
now the same; the only difference was that the advertising
sample was enclosed in an outer mailer to be sent to the
doctor.
THE FILLING CONTRACTThe packaging contract under discussion totaled $88,000.
In the past year, Lucas had sold $80,000 worth of ma-
terials annually to Eastern. Lucas’s annual sales were
$32 million.
John Cao had designed an attractive new style of sam-
ple. Basically, it was a folded card holding strips of tablets
that could be pushed through one at a time, as required by
the patient. This one idea was to be used in the near future
to sample several other tablet products. John had devel-
oped the idea for marketing, expecting that he would get
both the printing and contract filling.
Although Eastern did 90 percent of their manufacturing
and packaging, they did not have the equipment to heat
seal the strip into the folded cards. When goods came in
from a contract packager such as Lucas, they were held in
inventory until required by marketing.
THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MARKETING AND PURCHASINGWhile Shannon and John had been able to work well to-
gether, they were having their difficulties in getting the co-
operation of other departments involved. Frequent instanc-
es of sample mailings being late or sales representatives
being out of stock continued to plague the success of their
program. Delays had been caused by late ordering of com-
ponents from outside suppliers, shortages of tablets, and
mailing lists being incorrectly printed. In their attempts to
remedy the situation, Shannon and John had trampled on
a few toes. During attempts to investigate the causes for
these delays, the vice president of operations discovered
that there were usually good reasons offered by the depart-
ments involved.
Purchasing, manufacturing, and information systems
pointed out that they could not drop their usual work
“every time marketing wanted something in a rush.”
The feeling expressed by the production planner was
typical of most department managers: “It is fine to get
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 110joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 110 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 111
out the samples but rather pointless if we are running
out of finished product in the meantime. Some of those
unusual sample cartons slow down production up to
50 percent.”
While it was part of Andrew’s job to coordinate mar-
keting’s sample requirements, he was not making much
progress. His attempts to get each department to cooper-
ate met with the usual arguments that marketing was only
one department and had to wait its turn. Shannon and John
at times grew impatient with Andrew’s efforts, and they
started to go directly to each department manager.
Andrew felt that the action taken by Shannon tell-
ing the supplier how much contract filling business he
would get was the last straw. With this in mind, he went
to see Matt Roberts to try to get a policy statement on
the matter. Andrew wanted to know where the line was
drawn between purchasing’s and marketing’s responsi-
bility in matters dealing with company suppliers.
Matt explained that, because the marketing promo-
tion expenditure totaled $34 million or 22 percent of
sales, Eastern, like most other companies in the indus-
try, faced similar purchasing–marketing problems. If
marketing managers were responsible for their budgets,
they had the right to spend $1 each for 10,000 items, or
if they wanted, they could buy 5,000 items for $2 each
and still stay within their budget. It was a marketing
decision whether they were getting better results from
the $1 or $2 item. For these items, purchasing merely
produced a purchase order to confirm the deal already
made by marketing with the supplier. The policy ap-
plied to nonproduction items, such as calendars, letter
openers, diet sheets, patient history cards for doctors,
or displays and posters for drugstores. In contrast, pro-
duction and inventory purchases had last year reached
20 percent of sales revenues.
However, Matt pointed out that final selection of
sources for any purchased items that had to be pack-
aged by the plant had always been the responsibility of
the purchasing department. In this particular case, there
was still a significant inventory of old style samples in
the building, which marketing had not considered when
they promised John Cao 100 percent of the contract fill-
ing. Andrew felt that placing all the contract filling right
away would build up the stock of samples unnecessar-
ily. Besides this, he had negotiated a better price from
another reliable supplier, Sheppard Packaging, and felt
that he would give the balance of 75 percent to them.
Marketing, Matt Roberts explained, was only charged
for samples as they were shipped to sales representatives
or sent out to doctors. Therefore, marketing was not too
concerned about inventory levels as long as there were
no shortages. Packaging components and bulk products
held in inventory were not segregated from trade sizes in
the warehouse or in financial reports. Only the finished
samples were given a special account number so that the
marketing budget could be debited as the samples were
sent out.
NEXT STEPSMatt Roberts suggested that Andrew set up a meeting
the following week with Shannon and John so that each
department could state its case and settle on a process
for managing marketing-related purchases. Andrew
agreed and replied: “I understand that marketing wants
things to happen quickly, but we need to follow sound
purchasing practices. We should listen to their sugges-
tions regarding supplier selection—after all it is their
budget—but the final decision should rest with purchas-
ing. We have the responsibility to see that the greatest
possible value is received for every dollar spent. How
do we know prices are reasonable without getting other
quotations?”
Case 4–3
Portland Bus Company
Richard Kaplan, buyer at Portland Bus Company (“PBC”),
in Portland, Oregon, was preparing for his meeting with
Laura Henning, business consultant for Bothe US opera-
tions, on October 14. Laura would be assisting Richard in
managing a series of reverse auctions for approximately
290 components involving seven suppliers. This would be
PBC’s first use of reverse auctions, and several important
decisions had to be made before finalizing arrangements
for the online bidding event. Before his meeting with
Laura, Richard was to review alternatives for the auction
process, including the type of auction to be used and the
policy for selecting suppliers.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 111joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 111 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
112 Purchasing and Supply Management
EXHIBIT 1 Supplier Profiles
Supplier Profile Current Spend
Dawson Manufacturing Sheet metal and aluminum fabrication, using laser, CNC machining and plasma cutting technologies. Facility size: 110,000 sq. ft. Subsidiary of a North American-based automotive parts manufacturer with annual revenues of $2 billion.
$575,000
Imperial Fabrication Sheet metal fabrication using laser and computer integrated systems for the design, engineering and manufacturing of quality custom and standard products. Process capabilities: laser cutting, welding, punching, and bending. Facility size: 100,000 sq. ft. Privately held.
$650,000
Neelin Mfg. Inc. Contract manufacturing, machining, stamping, and assem-bly operations. Facility size: 80,000 sq. ft. Privately held.
Being considered for future business
C.R.N. Products Inc. Sheet metal fabrication, assembly, and painting for small- and high-volume production. Facility size: 60,000 sq. ft.
$210,000
Benson Sheet Metal Stamping and punching presses, riveting, steel shearing, tube forming, spot welding, and coating services. Facility size: 50,000 sq. ft. Privately held.
$460,000
Beranger Enterprises Ltd.
Light sheet metal processing and welding (1/20 and thin-ner) as well as CNC machining and turning of carbon steel, stainless steel, and aluminum. Facility size: 100,000 sq. ft. Privately held.
$40,000
Camber Machining Ltd. Machining, metal punching, and fabrication, using CNC equipment and on-site engineering capabilities. Facility size: 50,000 sq. ft. Privately held.
$40,000
PORTLAND BUSPBC was owned by Dawe Motors, a leading global pro-
ducer of passenger cars and commercial vehicles, head-
quartered in the United Kingdom. The Portland plant
assembled body shells for the Dawe Bus Division. The
shells were shipped from Portland to a facility in Medford,
Oregon, approximately 275 miles away, for final assembly
and painting.
Approximately 550 people worked at the PBC plant.
David McGregor, director of materials, headed a staff of
12 people, who were responsible for materials planning,
inventory control, and purchasing. Total annual purchases
were approximately $250 million across five main com-
modity groups: fabricated metal, systems, fiber glass, elec-
trical, and power train. However, approximately 75 per-
cent of purchases were set up through corporate purchasing
with strategic suppliers, leaving about $60 million to be
sourced through David’s organization. Richard reported
directly to David and was responsible for sourcing fabri-
cated metal components.
METAL COMPONENTSDuring the last three months, Richard had analyzed the
company’s spend in three fabricated metal parts catego-
ries: hinges, brackets, and ducts. Ten suppliers were cur-
rently responsible for 290 different part numbers, repre-
senting an annual spend of approximately $2 million. It
had been more than two years since a thorough review
of these commodity categories had been conducted, and
Richard felt that under current market conditions, signifi-
cant opportunities existed for cost savings.
Four of the PBC’s current suppliers were not in
Richard’s future plans because of concerns regarding past
performance. Furthermore, Richard intended to include
a new supplier, Neelin Mfg. Inc., in the online bidding
event. Exhibit 1 provides profiles of the seven suppliers
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 112joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 112 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
Chapter 4 Supply Processes and Technology 113
that Richard was considering for participation in the
reverse auction.
THE REVERSE AUCTIONRichard decided to group components into packages as
opposed to running 290 separate online bidding events.
Eventually, he settled on 21 packages of complementary
components, which were similar in terms of manufacturing
processes, quality requirements, and production volumes
(see Exhibit 2).
PBC’s parent company had a contract with Bothe AG, an
online bidding event solutions provider, to provide assistance
and technical support to all of its divisions for reverse auc-
tions. Located in Europe, North America, and Asia, Bothe
provided a range of consulting and technology platforms,
working with approximately 200 companies in the automo-
tive, construction, machinery manufacturing, and office sup-
plies industries. Its services included online auctions, supply
contract negotiations, supplier management, and a range of
web-based technology solutions. The Dawe passenger car
division in Europe had recently completed a reverse auction
project with Bothe and was very satisfied with the results.
Laura Henning, business consultant for Bothe US op-
erations, had been assigned to work with Richard to man-
age the reverse auction project. Laura and her team would
be responsible for:
1. Working suppliers to set up the Bothe technology
platform and providing training to their employees.
2. Communicating relevant documentation to suppliers
regarding details of the auction packages, such as part
specifications, quality requirements, and volumes.
3. Conducting a test auction with suppliers, and subse-
quently addressing any technical issues or questions
that arise.
Package # Part Numbers Annual Spend ($)
Hinges 7 32,551
Ducts 1 10 208,838
Ducts 2 13 106,236
Brackets 1 12 53,773
Brackets 2 12 119,912
Brackets 3 3 65,389
Brackets 4 9 111,500
Brackets 5 16 54,901
Brackets 6 13 65,997
Brackets 7 12 78,950
Brackets 8 21 48,108
Brackets 9 39 83,557
Brackets 10 15 84,630
Brackets 11 14 55,673
Brackets 12 16 64,734
Brackets 13 7 137,624
Brackets 14 2 71,675
Brackets 15 21 219,922
Brackets 16 18 133,896
Brackets 17 20 166,114
Brackets 18 10 49,771
Total 290 2,013,751
EXHIBIT 2Reverse Auction Packages
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 113joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 113 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
114 Purchasing and Supply Management
4. On the day of the auction, Bothe would monitor the
online bidding event and provide helpdesk support to
all parties involved. The Bothe platform allows the
buyer to watch the reverse auction live.
5. After the auction, Bothe would provide a detailed auc-
tion report to the buyer, including the results, which
would be available approximately two hours after the
auction event.
Laura had indicated that once arrangements were fi-
nalized it would take a maximum of two weeks to install
the Bothe platform at the suppliers and to train their staff.
Testing the platform would take an additional one or two
days. Richard expected that suppliers would need at least
two weeks to review the packages and prepare for the auc-
tions. Consequently, Richard was planning to run the auc-
tions starting the middle of November, and he hoped to
have everything completed by the Christmas holiday.
PREPARING FOR THE REVERSE AUCTIONThe meeting on October 14 was to finalize the schedule for
the reverse auction events, review alternatives for the auc-
tion process, including the type of auction to be used, and
set policies for selecting suppliers. Since this was PBC’s
first reverse auction, David McGregor was sensitive that
any decisions might have implications for similar projects
in the future. Consequently, he expected to review Richard’s
plan before proceeding.
Laura explained to Richard that there were a variety of
methods for conducting a reverse auction, and the primary
decisions included visibility (e.g., what the bidders would see
during the auction), length of the auction, policies for extend-
ing the length of the auction, and target pricing. For example,
the Bothe system could be configured such that every bidder
could see the current best price only, a ranking of all bid pric-
es (displayed by color codes), or the bidder’s rank only (e.g.,
best, second, third, etc.). Laura also indicated that while most
auctions ran 15 or 30 minutes, it was not uncommon to have
policies that extended the event provided there was still bid-
ding activity at the end of the designated time. Furthermore,
buyers in some reverse auctions set target prices to provide a
pricing benchmark for bidders.
Lastly, Richard needed to decide on what basis the pack-
ages should be awarded and to what extent prices could be
negotiated following the auction. David had indicated to
Richard that he expected a 25 percent reduction in costs as
an outcome of the reverse auction project. Richard felt that
other factors needed to be considered beyond price. For ex-
ample, he recognized that there would be costs of switch-
ing suppliers, and he wondered how this should be taken
into account when awarding business. For example, should
the lowest bidder be awarded the package if the price sav-
ings was less than the costs of switching? Furthermore, to
what extent should PBC take into consideration long-term
supply relationships when making the final sourcing deci-
sion from the reverse auctions? Richard wanted to be clear
and up-front as possible with the suppliers, some of whom
he expected may be reluctant to participate.
joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 114joh24099_ch04_074-114.indd 114 27/08/14 11:22 AM27/08/14 11:22 AM
115
Chapter Outline
Make or BuyReasons for MakingReasons for Buying The Gray Zone in Make or Buy
Subcontracting
Insourcing and OutsourcingInsourcing Outsourcing
Implications for SupplyOutsourcing Supply and Logistics
Supply’s Role in Insourcing and Outsourcing
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases5–1 Garland Chocolates5–2 Marshall Insurance Company5–3 Alicia Wong
Chapter Five
Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 115joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 115 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
116 Purchasing and Supply Management
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Change the way we currently take make or buy decisions?
• Consider insourcing more?
• Outsource more?
How can we
• Improve our ability to fi nd insourcing opportunities?
• Ensure that supply considerations receive full attention in make or buy decisions?
• Better develop our outsourcing expertise?
MAKE OR BUY
One of the most critical decisions in any organization is make or buy. When any organi-
zation is formed, a series of make or buy decisions need to be made. As the organization
grows and adds or drops products and/or services, make or buy decisions continue to be
made. In this text, make, buy, insource, and outsource are defi ned as follows. For any new
product or service, make or buy decisions need to be made. A make decision means the
organization will produce the good or provide the service internally. A buy decision means
the good or service will be procured from a supplier. Later, when internal and/or external
circumstances change, make or buy decisions are reviewed and some or all may be re-
versed. Insourcing refers to reversing a previous buy decision. An organization chooses to
bring in-house an activity, product, or service previously purchased. Outsourcing reverses
a previous make decision. Thus an activity, product, or service previously done in-house
will be purchased. See Figure 5–1. Supply managers can play a major role in make or buy
as well as insourcing and outsourcing decisions.
The character of the organization is colored by the organization’s stance on the make
or buy decision. It is one of vital importance to an organization’s productivity and com-
petitiveness. Historically, the make option tended to be favored by many large organiza-
tions, resulting in backward integration and ownership of a large range of manufacturing
and subassembly facilities. Major purchases were largely confi ned to raw materials, which
were then processed in-house.
Managerial thinking on this issue changed dramatically in the 1990s with increased global
competition, pressures to reduce costs, downsizing, and focus on the fi rm’s core competen-
cies. The trend changed to buying services or goods that might historically have been provided
or manufactured internally. Management trends favoring fl exibility and focus on corporate
strengths, closeness to the customer, and increased emphasis on productivity and competitive-
ness reinforce the idea of buying. It would be unusual if any one organization were superior
to competition in all aspects of manufacturing or creating services. By buying from capable
suppliers those requirements for which the buying organization has no special manufacturing
or service advantage, the management of the buying organization can concentrate better on its
main mission. With the world as a marketplace, it is the purchaser’s responsibility to search
for or develop world-class suppliers suitable for the strategic needs of the buying organization.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 116joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 116 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 117
A recent North American phenomenon has been the tendency to purchase services that
were traditionally performed in-house. These include security, food services, and mainte-
nance, but also programming, training, engineering, accounting, accounts payable, legal,
research, personnel, information systems, and even contract logistics and supply. Thus, a
new class of purchases involving services has evolved.
The make or buy decision is an interesting one because of its many dimensions. Almost
every organization is faced with it continually. For manufacturing companies, the make
alternative may be a natural extension of activities already present or an opportunity for
diversifi cation. For nonmanufacturing concerns, it is normally a question of services rather
than products. Should a hospital have its own laundry, operate its own dietary, security,
and maintenance services, or should it purchase these from suppliers? Becoming one’s
own supplier is an alternative that has not received much attention in this text so far, and
yet it is a vital option in every organization’s supply strategy.
What should be the attitude of an organization’s management toward this make or buy
issue? Many organizations do not have a consciously expressed policy but prefer to decide
each issue as it arises. Moreover, it can be diffi cult to gather meaningful accounting data
for economic analysis to support such decisions.
In the aggregate for the individual fi rm, the question is: What should our organiza-
tion’s objective be in terms of how much value should be added in-house as a percentage
of fi nal product or service cost and in what form? A strong supply group would favor a
FIGURE 5–1 Make or Buy and Insourcing and Outsourcing Decisions
Stay
LaterReview
100%Make
100%Buy
Execution
BusinessOpportunity
StrategicOperational
StrategicEntrepreneurial
Change
Outsource
Stay Change
What Do We Make or Buy?
Gray Zone
What Product/Service to Createin What Market Segment(s)?
GrayZone
100%Buy
GrayZone
100%Make
100%Make
GrayZone
100%Buy
GrayZone
Insource
MoreMake
Insource
MoreBuy
Outsource
Stay Change
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 117joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 117 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
118 Purchasing and Supply Management
buy tendency when other factors are not of overriding importance. For example, one cor-
poration found its supply ability in international markets such a competitive asset that it
deliberately divested itself of certain manufacturing facilities common to every competitor
in the industry. In the long term, make or buy and insource or outsource decisions must
contribute to building and maintaining resilient supply chains.
Reasons for MakingThere are many reasons that may lead an organization to produce a good or service in-house
rather than purchase. Competitive, political, social, or environmental reasons may force an
organization to make even when it might have preferred to buy. When a competitor ac-
quires ownership of a key source of raw material, it may force similar action. Many coun-
tries insist that a certain amount of processing of raw materials be done within national
boundaries. A company located in a high-unemployment area may decide to make certain
items to help alleviate this situation. A company may have to further process certain by-
products to make them environmentally acceptable. In each of these instances, cost may
not be the overriding concern. For additional reasons see Table 5–1.
Reasons for BuyingThere are many reasons why an organization may prefer to purchase goods or services,
including competitive, political, social, or environmental. Government contracts may re-
quire a specifi ed percentage of the organization’s spend to go to small businesses or to
veteran-, woman-, or minority-owned suppliers. A process may require a large amount of
water that is scarce locally, or create diffi cult disposal issues in a particular location. Fre-
quently, certain suppliers have built a reputation that makes their component a preferred
part of the fi nished product. Normally, these are branded items that can be used to make
the total piece of equipment more acceptable to the fi nal user. The manufacturers of trans-
portation, construction, or mining equipment frequently let the customer specify the power
1. The quantities are too small and/or no supplier is interested or available. 2. Quality requirements may be so exacting or so unusual as to require special
processing methods that suppliers cannot be expected to provide. 3. Greater assurance of supply or a closer coordination of supply with the demand. 4. To preserve technological secrets. 5. To obtain a lower cost. 6. To take advantage of or avoid idle equipment and/or labor. 7. To ensure steady running of the corporation’s own facilities, leaving suppliers to bear
the burden of fl uctuations in demand. 8. To avoid sole-source dependency. 9. To reduce risk.10. The purchase option is too expensive.11. The distance from the closest available supplier is too great.12. A signifi cant customer required it.13. Future market potential for the product or service is expanding rapidly.14. Forecasts of future shortages in the market or rising prices.15. Management takes pride in size.
TABLE 5–1Why Make?
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 118joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 118 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 119
plant brand and see this option as advantageous in selling their equipment. For additional
reasons see Table 5–2.
The arguments advanced for either side of the make or buy question sound similar: bet-
ter quality, quantity, delivery, price/cost, service, lower risk, greater opportunity to contrib-
ute to the fi rm’s competitive position, and ability to provide greater customer satisfaction.
Therefore, each individual make or buy decision requires careful analysis of both options.
Even in the make decision, there will likely be a signifi cant supply input requirement and
there is even a greater one for the buy option. Thus, supply managers are constantly re-
quired to provide information, judgments, and expertise to assist the organization in resolv-
ing make or buy decisions wisely.
The Gray Zone in Make or BuyResearch by Leenders and Nollet suggests that a “gray zone” may exist in make or buy
situations. There may be a range of options between 100 percent make or 100 percent buy.
(See Figure 5–1.) This middle ground may be particularly useful for testing and learning
without having to make the full commitment to make or buy. Particularly in the purchase of
services, where no equipment investment is involved, it may be that substantial economies
accrue to the organization that can substitute low-cost internal labor for expensive outside
staff or low-cost external labor for expensive internal staff.
A good example of a gray zone trade-off in the automotive industry is the supplier who
takes over design responsibility for a component from the car manufacturer. In mainte-
nance, some types of servicing can be done by the purchaser of the equipment, other types
by the equipment manufacturer.
The gray zone in make or buy may offer valuable opportunities or superior options for
both purchaser and supplier.
1. The organization may lack managerial or technical expertise in the production of the items or services in question.
2. Lack of production capacity. This may affect relationships with other suppliers or customers as well.
3. To reduce risk. 4. The challenges of maintaining long-term technological and economic viability for a
noncore activity. 5. A decision to make, once made, is often diffi cult to reverse. Union pressures and
management inertia combine to preserve the status quo. Thus, buying outside is seen as providing greater fl exibility.
6. To assure cost accuracy. 7. There are more options in potential sources and substitute items. 8. There may not be suffi cient volume to justify in-house production. 9. Future forecasts show great demand or technological uncertainty, and the fi rm is
unable or unwilling to undertake the risk of manufacture.10. The availability of a highly capable supplier nearby.11. The desire to stay lean.12. Buying may open up markets for the fi rm’s products or services.13. The ability to bring a product or service to market faster.14. A signifi cant customer may demand it.15. Superior supply management expertise.
TABLE 5–2Why Buy?
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 119joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 119 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
120 Purchasing and Supply Management
SUBCONTRACTING
A special class of the make or buy spectrum is the area of subcontracting. Common in military
and construction procurement, subcontracts can exist only when there are prime contractors
who bid out part of the work to other contractors: hence the term subcontractor. In its simplest
form, a subcontract is a purchase order written with more explicit terms and conditions. Its
complexity and management vary in direct proportion to the value and size of the program
to be managed. The management of a subcontract may require unique skills and abilities be-
cause of the amount and type of correspondence, charts, program reviews, and management
reporting that are necessary. Additionally, payment may be handled differently and is usually
negotiated along with the actual pricing and terms and conditions of the subcontract.
The use of a subcontract is appropriate when placing orders for work that is diffi cult to
defi ne, will take a long period of time, and will be extremely costly. For example, aerospace
companies subcontract many of the larger structural components and avionics. Wings,
landing gears, and radar systems are examples of high-cost items that might be purchased
on a subcontract. The subcontract is normally administered by a team that might include
a subcontract administrator (SCA), an equipment engineer, a quality assurance representa-
tive, a reliability engineer, a material price/cost analyst, a program offi ce representative,
and/or an on-site representative.
Managing the subcontract is a complex activity that requires knowledge about perfor-
mance to date as well as the ability to anticipate actions needed to ensure the desired end
results. The SCA must maintain cost, schedule, technical, and confi guration control from
the beginning to the completion of the task.
Cost control of the subcontract begins with the negotiation of a fair and reasonable cost,
proper choice of the contract type, and thoughtfully imposed incentives. Schedule control
requires the development of a good master schedule that covers all necessary contract
activities realistically. Well-designed written reports and recovery programs, where neces-
sary, are essential. Technical control must ensure that the end product conforms to all the
performance parameters of the specifi cations that were established when the contract was
awarded. Confi guration control ensures that all changes are documented. Good confi gura-
tion control is essential to “aftermarket” and spares considerations for the product.
Unlike a normal purchase order of minimal complexity, where fi nal closeout may be
accomplished by delivery and payment, a major subcontract involves more defi nite actions to
close. These actions vary with the contract type and diffi culty of the item/task being procured.
Quite often large and complex procurements require a number of changes during the period
of performance. These changes result in cost claims that must be settled prior to contract clo-
sure. Additionally, any tooling or data supplied to the contractor to support the effort must be
returned. All deliverable material, data, and reports must be received and inspected. Each sub-
contract’s requirements will vary in the complexity of the closure requirements; however, in all
cases a subcontract performance summary should be written to provide a basis for evaluation of
the supplier for future bidder or supplier selection. Such a report also is necessary in providing
information for subsequent claims or renegotiation.
Subcontracts may also apply to services. For example, the “primary supplier” of an
item of Durable Medical Equipment, Prosthetics, Orthotics, and Supplies (DMEPOS)
is the enrolled supplier that bills Medicare for reimbursement. The primary supplier is
responsible for the overall service of furnishing the item and coordinating the care in
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 120joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 120 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 121
compliance with the physician’s order and Medicare rules and guidelines. The primary
supplier may subcontract certain services such as purchase of inventory, delivery, and
instruction on use of the item, and repair of rented equipment.
INSOURCING AND OUTSOURCING
Insourcing and outsourcing occur when the decisions are made to reverse past make or buy
decisions. Just because the decision to make or buy was properly made originally, this does
not mean it cannot be changed. New circumstances inside the organization, in the market,
or in the environment may require the organization to reverse its stance on a previous make
or buy decision.
If the previous decision to make or buy was improperly made and can be corrected
subsequently, this should be done. However, the arguments for constantly reassessing past
make or buy decisions are particularly strong. Perceived risks may have been minimized
or eliminated. New technology may permit processes previously considered impossible.
New suppliers may have entered the market or old suppliers may have left. New trade-offs
between raw materials and components, such as substitution of steel by plastic, may result
in new options. It is this constant change in volumes, prices, capabilities, specifi cations,
suppliers, capacities, regulations, competitors, technology, and managers that requires sup-
ply managers to review their current make and buy profi le continuously in identifying new
strengths and weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.
The two questions that need to be addressed on an ongoing basis by a cross-functional
team including supply, operations, accounting and marketing are: (1) Which products or
services are we currently buying that we should be doing in-house? (2) Which products and
services that we are currently doing in-house should we be buying from suppliers?
InsourcingInsourcing, the often forgotten twin of outsourcing, deals with past buy decisions that are
reversed. Given the demands on procurement managers’ time, the likelihood that supply
managers will initiate an insourcing initiative is relatively small. Continuing to buy is likely
to be standard practice. From a supply perspective there are, however, several reasons why
supply might have to trigger an insourcing initiative. The most obvious reason is when an
existing source of supply goes out of business or drops a product or service line and no other
supplier is available. Assuming the requirement for product or service continues, the supply
manager needs to fi nd an alternate source. Supplier development or the creation of a new
supplier who was previously not selling the product or service is one option. The other is to
insource. Similarly, a sudden massive increase in price, the purchase of a sole source by a
competitor, political events and regulatory changes, or a lack of supply of a key raw material
or component required for the manufacture of the purchased product might force supply to
consider insourcing. Thus, anything that threatens assurance of supply may provide supply
a reason for insourcing. This might be called the necessity argument: “We would prefer not
to produce this product or service in-house, but we really don’t have any other options.”
There are other organizational factors that may make insourcing an attractive option. The
reasons would be similar to the “make” arguments provided earlier in this chapter in the
make or buy discussion. We may have developed a unique process for this product or ser-
vice. Our quality, delivery, total cost of ownership, or fl exibility would be vastly improved.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 121joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 121 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
122 Purchasing and Supply Management
We could provide superior customer service and satisfaction. Insourcing would greatly en-
hance our competitive ability. This might be called the opportunity argument: “We would
prefer to do this in-house because it would give us a strategic competitive advantage.”
After the decision to insource has been taken, the smooth transition from suppliers to
internal manufacture or service delivery will require supply’s special attention. In the fi rst
place, how do we discontinue our dealings with our existing supplier(s)? Can the change-
over occur simultaneously with current contract expiries or may penalties have to be paid
to terminate existing commitments?
With any insourcing initiatives, there is also a new supply issue in terms of raw ma-
terials, components, equipment, energy, and services required to produce the particular
requirement just insourced. Therefore, supply’s capability to provide the required inputs
competently is one of the factors to be considered in any insourcing decision.
The Alicia Wong case at the end of this chapter is an interesting example of an insourc-
ing decision. This case describes the opportunity to produce mustard in-house, rather than
purchasing it from an outside supplier. Because mustard is used in many products, the
decision focuses not only on whether this insourcing is an attractive proposition, but also,
if the decision is to go ahead, how to ensure it will be successful. The Wentworth Hospital
case in Chapter 7 illustrates a situation where insourcing contract repair services is being
considered as a result of a combination of cost and supplier performance issues.
OutsourcingOrganizations outsource when they decide to buy something they had been making in-
house previously. For example, a company whose employees clean the buildings may
decide to hire a janitorial fi rm to provide this service. Depending on the good or service,
suppliers may be domestic (onshore) or international (offshore). Offshoring is discussed in
Chapter 14, “Global Supply Management.” A huge wave of outsourcing and privatization
(in the public sector) has hit almost all organizations since the late 1980s. Public and pri-
vate organizations have outsourced a broad range of functions and activities formerly per-
formed in-house as they downsize, “right-size,” and eliminate headquarters staff to focus
on value-added activities and core competencies to survive and prosper.
Almost no function is immune to outsourcing. Some activities, such as janitorial, food, and
security services, have been outsourced for many years. Information Technology (IT), legal,
and health care services such as radiology have received much attention recently as targets for
outsourcing. Other popular outsourcing targets are mail rooms, copy centers, and corporate
travel departments. Accounts payable, human resources, marketing/sales, fi nance, administra-
tion, logistics, engineering, and even supply are examples of functions now outsourced.
An entire function may be outsourced, or some elements of an activity may be out-
sourced and some kept in-house. For example, some of the elements of information tech-
nology may be strategic, some may be critical, and some may lend themselves to lower
cost purchase and management by a third party. Identifying a function as a potential out-
sourcing target, and then breaking that function into its components, allows the decision
makers to determine which activities are strategic or critical and should remain in-house,
and which can be outsourced.
The growth in outsourcing in the logistics area is attributed to transportation deregulation,
the focus on core competencies, reductions in inventories, and enhanced logistics management
computer programs. Lean inventories mean there is less room for error in deliveries, especially
if the organization is operating in a just-in-time mode. Trucking companies have added logistics
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 122joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 122 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 123
to their businesses—changing from merely moving goods from point A to point B, to managing
all or a part of all shipments over a longer period of time, typically three years, and replacing
the shipper’s employees with their own. Logistics companies have computer tracking technol-
ogy that reduces the risk in transportation and allows the logistics company to add more value
to the fi rm than it could if the function were performed in-house. Third-party logistics (3PL)
providers offer integrated operations, warehousing, and transportation services. The ability to
track freight using electronic data interchange technology and a satellite system to tell custom-
ers exactly where its drivers are and when the delivery will be made is critical in a just-in-time
environment, where the delivery window may be only 30 minutes.
For example, Hewlett-Packard turned over its inbound raw materials warehousing in Van-
couver, Washington, to Roadway Logistics. Roadway’s 140 employees operate the ware-
house 24 hours a day, seven days a week, coordinating the delivery of parts to the warehouse
and managing storage. Hewlett-Packard’s 250 employees were transferred to other company
activities. Hewlett-Packard reports savings of 10 percent in warehousing operating costs.
The reasons for outsourcing are similar to those advanced for the buy option in make
or buy decisions earlier in this chapter. There is a key difference, however. Because the
organization was previously involved in producing the product or service itself, the ques-
tion arises: What happens to the employees and space and equipment previously dedicated
to this product or service now outsourced?
Layoffs often result, and even in cases where the service provider (third party) hires
former employees, they are often hired back at lower wages with fewer benefi ts. Outsourc-
ing is perceived by many unions as efforts to circumvent union contracts. The United Auto
Workers union has been particularly active in trying to prevent auto manufacturers from
outsourcing parts of their operations. Additional concerns over outsourcing include:
• Loss of control.
• Exposure to supplier risks: fi nancial weakness, loss of supplier commitment, slow im-
plementation, promised features or services not available, lack of responsiveness, poor
daily quality.
• Unexpected fees or “extra use” charges.
• Diffi culty in quantifying economics; conversion costs.
• Supply restraints.
• Attention required by senior management.
• Possibility of being tied to obsolete technology, and
• Concerns with long-term flexibility and meeting changing business requirements.
As organizations have gained more experience in making outsourcing decisions and crafting
outsourcing contracts, they have become better at applying sourcing and contracting expertise
to these decisions. From writing the statement of work (SOW) or request for proposal (RFP) to
defi ning the terms and conditions, the success of an outsourcing agreement lies in the details.
There are two cases on outsourcing at the end of this chapter that are illustrative of
outsourcing decisions in different contexts. Garland Chocolates is considering outsourcing
packaging for Edgeworth Toffee rather than investing in expensive capital equipment. The
Marshall Insurance Company case deals with a proposal by a supplier to handle forms and
printed materials inventory management. The Garland Chocolates case presents outsourc-
ing in a traditional manufacturing context, while the Marshall case illustrates outsourcing
a service in an administrative setting.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 123joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 123 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
124 Purchasing and Supply Management
IMPLICATIONS FOR SUPPLY
Supply and logistics management may be involved in make or buy and insource or out-
source decisions in two ways: (1) Some or all of the activities of the supply and logistics
functions may be a target for outsourcing. (2) Supply and logistics may be part of an inter-
nal team conducting analysis for a make or buy, or insource or outsource decision.
Outsourcing Supply and LogisticsWhile the supply function may be outsourced completely, the procurement of indirect or
noncore spend is more likely to be outsourced than procurement of direct or core spend.
Benefi ts from outsourcing procurement may include improved process compliance and
control, optimized working capital, and improved process effi ciency.
There are three types of procurement outsourcing contracts: procure-to-pay (P2P),
source-to-contract (S2C), and source-to-pay (S2P). P2P contracts cover the procure-
ment activities of day-to-day purchasing (approval workfl ow, material acquisition,
purchase order, expediting, material and invoice receipt, and invoice payment), per-
formance management (fi nancial performance, compliance management, policies and
procedures, and performance and results reporting), and accounts payable (master
data maintenance, process payment request, travel and expense (T&E) claims process-
ing, EDI/P-card administration, month-end closing, supplier inquiries, and reporting).
Source-to-contract (S2C) procurement outsourcing includes spend data management,
strategic sourcing, supplier management, and demand management. Source-to-pay
(S2P) procurement outsourcing is an end-to-end suite that includes all the processes in
procure-to-pay and source-to-pay.
For example, in 2007, Microsoft selected Accenture as its procurement process outsourc-
ing provider. Accenture rolled out common processes across 95 countries in 36 languages
from four service centers. Operational costs were reduced by 35 percent, plus negotiated
savings were up 35 percent from the prior year. Standardized global processes and increased
transparency enabled early payment discount savings of over $10 million.1
Many tasks associated with the logistics function as well as the entire function itself
have been heavily outsourced. According to Capgemini’s 17th Annual Third Party Logis-
tics study (2012), transactional, operational, and repetitive activities such as transportation,
warehousing and freight forwarding tend to be the most frequently outsourced. Shippers
outsourced 54 percent of their transportation spend and 39 percent of their warehouse
operations. The three primary reasons for outsourcing logistics activities are improved
services, reduced costs, and increased ability to focus on core competencies.
Deciding what represents a core competency to an organization is not always an easy
task, nor is the decision always the same for a specifi c function. For example, owner-
ship and management of an in-house fl eet of vehicles may be subject to the decision to
outsource or maintain in-house. In an organization where the sales force is large, the cars
for sales representatives may be seen as an extension of the sales force, and part of the
company’s ability to outperform the competition in personal sales. Many of the functions
of fl eet may be outsourced—leasing rather than owning vehicles, maintenance, resale
1www.accenture.com/SiteCollectionDocuments/PDF/Accenture-Procurement-BPO-Infographic-fi nal.pdf.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 124joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 124 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 125
of vehicles—but the contact with the drivers may be retained as an in-house function
because keeping the drivers (sales force) happy is critical to the success of the organiza-
tion. In a utility company, the mechanical expertise needed to maintain specialty vehicles
may be seen as part of the company’s core competency, whereas the maintenance of the
automobile fl eet may not. The outsourcing decision is a function of many factors, and
each organization must assess these factors based on the goals and objectives and long-
term strategy of the organization.
Supply’s Role in Insourcing and OutsourcingResearch indicates that supply has had relatively moderate involvement in the outsourcing
decisions made in many organizations. However, given the nature of these insourcing and out-
sourcing decisions, supply managers should be heavily involved to add in the following ways:
• Providing a comprehensive, competitive process.
• Identifying opportunities for insourcing or outsourcing.
• Aiding in selection of sources.
• Identifying potential relationship issues.
• Developing and negotiating the contract.
• Ongoing monitoring and management of the relationship.
The strategic importance of make or buy and insourcing and outsourcing decisions is
high, so management must ensure these decisions are right. Appropriate supply input is
critical when making these decisions and in managing the outcomes.
Conclusion Make or buy, insourcing and outsourcing are key strategic decisions for any organization.
That each of these decisions can be reviewed and reversed at a later date, as conditions
warrant, adds to the challenge of maintaining an appropriate mix of in-house activities and
purchased goods and services. Effective supply management requires an ongoing active
contribution from supply into this continuing assessment process. The more skilled the
supply group at exploiting market opportunities and developing competitive sources, the
more ready the organization should be to buy and outsource.
1. Why should an organization switch from buying to making?
2. What is insourcing? How might one make the decision to insource an activity
or not?
3. Why is the make or buy decision considered strategic?
4. What is the gray zone in make or buy? What are its implications?
5. Why might an organization decide to outsource? Can you give an example?
6. What is subcontracting? How does subcontracting differ from a typical purchase order
(PO)?
7. Why would an organization outsource its logistics? Engineering? Marketing?
Questions for Review and Discussion
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 125joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 125 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
8. In the public sector what name is frequently used for outsourcing? What are some
major advantages to outsourcing in the public sector?
9. What role is expected of supply once an outsourcing decision has been made?
10. If you were the sole owner of your own company, would you favor making or buying?
Why?
Brewer, B.; B. Ashenbaum; and J. R. Carter. “Understanding the Supply Chain
Outsourcing Cascade: When Does Procurement Follow Manufacturing Out the Door?”
Journal of Supply Chain Management 49, no. 3 (July 2013), pp. 90–110.
Dabhilkar, M. “Trade-Offs in Make-Buy Decisions.” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 17, no. 3 (2011), pp. 158–166.
Halvey, J. K., and B. M. Melby. Business Process Outsourcing: Process, Strategies and Contracts. 2nd. ed. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
Kroes, J. R., and S. Ghosh. “Outsourcing Congruence with Competitive Priorities: Impact
on Supply Chain and Firm Performance.” Journal of Operations Management 28, no. 2
(2010) pp. 124–143.
Langley, C. J. 2013 Third-Party Logistics Study: The State of Logistics Outsourcing.
Phoenix, AZ: Capgemini Consulting.
Leuschner, R.; C. R. Carter; T. J. Goldsby; and Z. S. Rogers. “Third-Party Logistics: A
Meta-Analytic Review and Investigation of its Impact on Performance.” Journal of Supply Chain Management 50, no. 1 (2014) pp. 21–43.
Li, M., and T. Y. Choi. “Triads in Services Outsourcing: Bridge, Bridge Decay and Bridge
Transfer.” Journal of Supply Chain Management 45, no. 3 (2009), pp. 27–39.
Park, J. K., and Y. K. Ro. “The Impact of a Firm’s Make, Pseudo-make, or Buy Strategy
on Product Performance.” Journal of Operations Management 29, no. 4 (2011),
pp. 289–304.
Van der Valk, W., and J. van Iwaarden. “Monitoring in Service Triads Consisting of
Buyers, Subcontractors and End Customers.” Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management 17, no. 3 (2011) pp. 198–206.
Vitasek, K.; K. Manrodt; and M. Ledyard. Vested Outsourcing: Five Rules That Will Transform Outsourcing, 2nd ed. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2013.
References
Case 5–1
Garland Chocolates
Shanti Suppiah, director of operations at the Garland Choc-
olates plant in Durham, North Carolina, was preparing for
a team meeting scheduled for Monday, March 18, to de-
cide what to do about declining margins for the Edgeworth
Toffee brand. Options were to invest in new equipment or
outsource manufacturing and packing. It was Wednesday,
March 12, and Shanti needed to prepare her analysis and
develop a recommendation prior to the meeting.
GARLAND CHOCOLATESHeadquartered in London, UK, Garland Chocolates
(Garland) was a leading global food manufacturer with an-
nual revenues of $3 billion. The company produced a wide
range of chocolate and confectionary products, under more
than 65 brands. It operated more than 50 plants globally, in-
cluding eight plants in the United States. Garland’s products
126 Purchasing and Supply Management
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 126joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 126 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 127
in an effort to spur consumer interest in the brand, marketing
was proposing a new marketing strategy that included a face-
lift for the packaging. However, the new packaging would re-
quire a different type of packing technology. John Slaughter,
the representative from marketing on the Edgeworth Toffee
team, felt that the introduction of new packaging combined
with a new marketing campaign could deliver as much as a
20 percent increase in sales. It was unclear to Shanti whether
the new marketing strategy would be enough to stimulate in-
creased sales, or if the product was mature and a decline in
demand was inevitable.
THE MANUFACTURING AND PACKING LINE REPLACEMENT OPTIONSThe accounting department set standard costs for each
product line annually. Exhibit 1 provides the standard
costs for Edgeworth Toffee, and Exhibit 2 shows actual
operating performance data for the manufacturing and
packing lines. As shown in Exhibit 2, the packing line
was operating at 48 percent efficiency, and the scrap
rate was nearly 10 percent. Annual maintenance costs
on the packing line were approximately $18,000 per
year and expected to increase by at least 25 percent in
the next 12 months.
Working with Ian Haase, purchasing manager at the
Durham plant and a member of the Edgeworth Toffee
team, Shanti obtained an estimate of $140,000 for the cost
of replacing the two packing lines for Edgeworth Toffee,
including installation. It was expected that the new equip-
ment would be able to achieve the BPO efficiency and
scrap rate targets and be able to accommodate the new
packaging that marketing was recommending.
Shanti also felt that it was time to examine replace-
ment of the manufacturing line. The manufacturing and
packing lines had originally been installed together
more than 20 years earlier. Although efficiency of the
were among the leading brands in the industry, and the Dur-
ham plant manufactured 20 product lines that were distrib-
uted to retail customers in North America, including grocery
store chains, boutique candy shops, and convenience stores.
Garland’s brands were managed by cross-functional
teams with representatives from sales and marketing, op-
erations, finance, engineering, purchasing, and distribution.
Each team was governed by corporate goals for growth, prof-
itability, and brand management, but was given significant
autonomy to make strategic and tactical decisions in order to
achieve their business performance objectives (BPOs).
The competitive nature of the industry placed an
upper limit on prices, so margins were determined by
production and supply chain efficiencies. Consequent-
ly, cost control and continuous improvement were high
priorities. The company’s enterprise resource planning
(ERP) system generated weekly BPO reports for team
members.
THE EDGEWORTH TOFFEE BRANDProduction of Edgeworth Toffee was a two-step process:
manufacturing and packing. The product was manufac-
tured in two formats. The first format was a fixed-size,
retail-ready pack, which contained a half-pound of toffee.
The second format was a 10-pound bulk package that was
placed in stores so that customers could select the amount
of toffee they wanted and self-pack the product. Produc-
tion of the fixed-size format was approximately 2,500 cas-
es a year, compared to approximately 3,000 cases a year
of the bulk format. Both formats sold for $145 per case.
There were two dedicated packing lines for Edgeworth
Toffee, one for each format. However, the packing lines had
long outlived their useful lives, and efficiencies had declined
in recent years (see Exhibit 1). Furthermore, sales of Edge-
worth Toffee had been flat for the past couple of years, and
EXHIBIT 2 Manufacturing and Packing Line Performance Statistics
MeasureStandard
(%)Actual
(%)
Manufacturing efficiencyManufacturing scrap ratePacking efficiencyPacking scrap rate
801.2801.2
761.5489.6
EXHIBIT 1 Operating Standard Costs for Edgeworth Toffee
$ per case %
Selling priceRaw materialPackaging materialLabor—manufacturingLabor—packingOverhead & depreciationTotal costMargin
$145.00 24.65 29.00 13.05 7.25 21.75 95.70 49.30
100 17 20 9 5 15 66 34
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 127joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 127 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
128 Purchasing and Supply Management
manufacturing line was close to the target of 80 per-
cent, it was also showing signs of deterioration. The ef-
ficiency rate had declined to 76 percent, compared to
more than 90 percent five years prior, and it had become
increasingly more difficult to find replacement parts.
A new manufacturing line would cost approximately
$600,000 installed.
OUTSOURCINGIn addition to investigating options to replace the existing
manufacturing and packing lines, Shanti had also looked
into outsourcing. A preliminary review indicated that there
would be substantial coordination costs if only packing
was outsourced; therefore, outsourcing manufacturing and
packing was investigated. Ian and Shanti selected two con-
tract manufacturers to submit proposals, Martin Contract
Manufacturing (Martin) and Dasari Inc. Bids were requested
from both for the existing packaging and the new pack-
aging proposed by marketing. In order to make sure the
suppliers were well informed about the manufacturing and
packing processes, both were invited to tour the Durham
plant, and they were provided with detailed information
and related data regarding the operation of the lines.
Following a review of the proposals submitted by the
suppliers, Ian and Shanti decided that Martin had the best
bid. Martin quoted a cost of $68.00 for manufacturing and
packing for both the current packaging and marketing’s
new packaging. The supplier would be responsible for raw
material and packaging material costs. In addition, Garland
would pay $35,000 in tooling costs up front. Martin indicated
that it would need six months to ramp up production of Edge-
worth Toffee.
THE TEAM MEETINGAs Shanti looked at the information on her laptop that
had been collected regarding manufacturing and packing
of Edgeworth Toffee, she knew that something had to be
done to address the declining margins of the brand as a re-
sult of increased production costs. Investing in new equip-
ment seemed like an obvious solution; however, the capital
investment would be significant and her proposal would
need to exceed the company’s 10 percent cost of capital
rate to get approval by finance.
While reviewing the proposal by Martin, Shanti felt that
some of the overhead costs at the Durham plant could be elim-
inated if production of Edgeworth Toffee was outsourced.
The estimate provided by the accounting department was that
overhead costs allocated to the brand could be reduced by ap-
proximately 30 percent if production was outsourced.
Historically, the company’s strategy had been to
control production of its products to ensure quality and
delivery performance. Garland had an excellent reputa-
tion with it customers and the customer service level
for Edgeworth Toffee was a line fill rate of 98 percent.
However, if the case to outsource could be made suc-
cessfully to the team on Monday, Shanti felt that senior
management would approve the proposal. This was an
important decision and she wanted to make a clear rec-
ommendation at the meeting on Monday, supported by a
thorough analysis of both options.
Case 5–2
Marshall Insurance Company
Kara Murphy, purchasing manager with Marshal Insur-
ance Company (Marshall), in Spokane, Washington, was
evaluating a proposal submitted from David Callum, from
Gilmore Printing (Gilmore). David was proposing that
Gilmore take responsibility for managing all forms and
printed materials inventory for the Marshall Automobile
Club. Kara could see the advantages of outsourcing man-
agement of printed materials, but she remained concerned
that this arrangement would not provide the service that
clients and employees had come to expect. It was Thurs-
day, June 12, and David was expecting a response from
Kara on Tuesday, June 17, during a meeting scheduled for
that afternoon.
MARSHALL INSURANCE COMPANYThe Marshall Insurance Company was a large, publicly
held, personal lines property and casualty insurer.
Founded in 1948, it had $73.5 billion in total assets.
The Marshall Automobile Club (MAC) was a division
of Marshall that provided roadside assistance services
to its clients 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Its more
than 750,000 clients included both individuals and
corporations.
MAC provided services to two customer groups, corporate
clients, such as original equipment automotive manufacturers
(OEMs) who provide free roadside assistance plans with new
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 128joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 128 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
Chapter 5 Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing 129
vehicle purchases, and individuals (or retail clients). Individ-
ual members could choose from a variety of plans for families
that provided coverage for cars, trucks, motorcycles, and rec-
reational vehicles. In addition to traditional roadside services,
MAC offered features such as a trip planning, a travel reserva-
tion service, and trip interruption insurance.
Individual clients would join MAC through an online reg-
istration tool or by completing a form at a local Marshall of-
fice. Payment was typically made using a credit card. OEM
clients sent their membership information to MAC daily in
encrypted data files. Both individual and corporate client
membership information was processed at the Spokane of-
fice, where membership cards were prepared and sent out
along with an information kit that included a welcome let-
ter, handbook, various promotional materials, and a keychain.
Kits were customized for each client, in some cases us-
ing OEM letterhead if the member was joining as part as a
new vehicle purchase plan. Anywhere from 2,000 to 3,000
kits were assembled each week, which took the time of two
full-time staff. It was common to have more staff work on kit
assembly in periods of strong demand. Storeroom staff were
paid $900 per week plus benefits.
Kara’s responsibilities included managing the 3,000
square foot storeroom, where printed materials were stored
and kits were assembled. In addition to materials for distri-
bution to new clients, other printed materials included MAC
marketing brochures and promotional materials. In total, more
than 250 different printed products were held in inventory. In
order to take advantage of discounts from printing suppliers,
MAC had four to six months of inventory for many products.
THE GILMORE PROPOSALDuring a meeting the previous week, David Callum proposed
to Kara that his company take responsibility for managing
forms and printed materials for MAC. The proposal indicated
that Gilmore would manage relationships with printing sup-
pliers, including inventory management, kit fulfillment, and
distribution to clients. David described how they were pro-
viding this service to other large corporate clients, in a range
of industries, that were interested in eliminating manual
back- office operations. He indicated that the typical fee was
approximately $3.00 per kit, including mailing costs. The
purpose of the meeting on Tuesday was to see if there was
interest from Kara in pursuing the proposal; at that time Kara
would need to provide David with details regarding annual
volumes and materials involved.
Kara could see the advantages of outsourcing manage-
ment of the storeroom operations and kit assembly. Of-
fice space was at a premium at Marshal, and the storeroom
could easily be converted to other uses. The headaches
associated with ordering materials and maintaining inven-
tory records could be eliminated.
However, Kara did have concerns. First, she was suspi-
cious that Gilmore was looking to take over all the printing
business for MAC. Although an important supplier, Gilmore
was currently responsible for approximately 30 percent
of the printing purchases for MAC. Under the outsourcing
arrangement proposed by David, Gilmore would take over
existing contracts with Marshall suppliers, but as these
contracts expired, it would be up to Gilmore to decide who
would do the printing.
Secondly, timely processing of client membership cards
and kits was critical. The expectation was that these materials
would be processed within 24 hours. Kara was worried about
maintaining service levels under an outsourcing arrangement
with Gilmore. Furthermore, client information was confiden-
tial, and Kara had concerns about security and ensuring that
Gilmore did not use the MAC client database for other pur-
poses, such as advertising and promoting products and ser-
vices for other customers.
PREPARING FOR THE MEETINGKara felt that the proposal from David had merit and
she wanted to give it careful consideration. As she ex-
amined the information he had left with her, Kara won-
dered how to proceed. Were the risks worth the potential
problems? What questions should she ask at the meeting
on Tuesday? And were there any conditions she should
place on the arrangement with Gilmore if they were to
proceed?
Case 5–3
Alicia WongAlicia Wong, Corporate Supply Manager, Thain Foods Lim-
ited, wanted to prepare a proposal to manufacture mustard
in-house. Mustard, an important ingredient in many of the
company’s products, was currently purchased from an out-
side supplier. She hoped a comprehensive proposal could be
prepared in one-month’s time for the CEO’s approval.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 129joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 129 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
130 Purchasing and Supply Management
GENERAL COMPANY BACKGROUNDThain Foods Limited (TFL) had been in business for more
than 30 years. Its products included a wide range of syrups,
fudges, cone dips, sauces, mayonnaise, and salad dress-
ings. Its customers were major food chains, hotels, and
restaurants in North America and Europe.
TFL believed in continuous improvement to its
operations. Over the last two years, it invested more than
$2 million in plant facilities, the bulk of it new, state-of-
the-art process equipment and process control. All produc-
tion and process control functions were computerized for
maximum efficiency.
TFL employed about 120 people. It had a corporate struc-
ture of CEO; president; executive vice president, domestic
sales; and national account manager and used a network of
food brokers who sold and promoted its products.
THE SUPPLY AREA Alicia was responsible for supply and reported direct-
ly to the CEO. She had an inventory control officer, a
buyer, and a receiver under her supervision. Purchas-
es could be classified into five different types: labels,
packaging, raw materials, commodities, and MRO sup-
plies. Mustard was an important raw material used in
many of TFL’s products.
CURRENT PRACTICE: PURCHASING MUSTARD EXTERNALLYWhenever mustard was required, the buyer e-mailed
the supplier and requested that it prepare the ap-
propriate amount to be picked up by a truck from
TFL. The purchase order would be prepared be-
fore the truck left for the supplier, normally the next
day. The mustard supplier used mustard seed as its
raw material and blended in the other ingredients af-
ter the seed had been reduced to mustard flour. Ev-
ery month TFL purchased 500 drums, or 100,000 li-
ters, of mustard. The cost of the mustard itself was
$64 per drum. Freight costs were borne by TFL and
amounted to about $8 per drum. TFL operated three
eight-hour shifts, five days a week. Each worker was
paid about $20 per hour. It took about 10 minutes of
a worker’s time to handle each drum. This included
pouring the mustard into the processing kettle, making
sure other added ingredients mixed well, and rinsing the
drums. The drums were bulky and, because they could
not be used in the plant for other purposes, had to be
rinsed for a contractor who took them away. The costs
of disposing of the drums in this manner were negligi-
ble. Other costs and overhead of purchasing were $0.02
per liter.
SUGGESTED CHANGE: MANUFACTURING MUSTARD IN-HOUSEThe mustard to be produced at TFL would be composed
of roughly 60 percent solid, 20 percent water, and 20
percent vinegar. The solid portion was a spice blend,
consisting essentially of mustard flour, salt, and other
spices that could be readily bought. Water was not a
problem because the city provided a reliable supply.
Vinegar was already a raw material that TFL ordered in
bulk regularly from suppliers. Alicia therefore believed
that it was a simple matter for TFL to make the mustard
for its own use. TFL only needed to buy the spice blend
and add water and vinegar in the right proportions. She
approached a supplier who indicated that it could make
the spice blend at a delivered price of $0.15 per liter for
TFL, including freight. However, it needed time for tests
to ensure that the blend would be of the right quality for
TFL’s use. Vinegar cost TFL $0.1875 per liter delivered
in 15,000 liter lots. And TFL was paying $0.025 per liter
for water. Alicia also checked whether production had
the time and equipment to make the mustard. Production
felt that the change would not be too drastic and no ad-
ditional workers would be necessary. However, it would
use up more of the existing workers’ time. Production
calculated that the change would entail a total labor and
overhead cost of about $0.105 per liter of mustard using
standard cost accounting for labor time and overhead
charges.
Alicia organized an information gathering and discus-
sion session involving supply, production, quality assur-
ance, and distribution to discuss the proposed change. The
workers were keen on the idea because this meant that they
would no longer have to haul and rinse the bulky drums
(water and vinegar could be easily channeled to the mix-
ing containers using existing pipes). However, quality as-
surance expressed concern about the quality of mustard if
produced in-house. Because the mustard was an ingredient
in many of TLF’s products, such a change might adversely
affect the quality and taste of these products.
Alicia wanted her proposal for in-house manufacture of
mustard to be in the company’s best interest and wondered
how to proceed next.
joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 130joh24099_ch05_115-130.indd 130 27/08/14 11:38 AM27/08/14 11:38 AM
131
Chapter Six
Need Identifi cation and Specifi cation
Chapter Outline
Need Criteria in the Value Proposition1. Strategic Criteria2. Traditional Criteria3. Additional Current Criteria
Categories of Needs1. Resale2. Raw and Semiprocessed Materials3. Parts, Components, and Packaging4. Maintenance, Repair, and Operating
Supplies5. Capital Assets6. Services7. Other
Repetitive or Nonrepetitive Requirements?
Commercial Equivalents
Early Supply and Supplier Involvement
Methods of DescriptionBrand“Or Equal”Specifi cationMiscellaneous Methods of DescriptionCombination of Descriptive MethodsSources of Specifi cation Data
Standardization and Simplifi cation
Conclusion
Questions for Review and Discussion
References
Cases6–1 Moren Corporation (A)6–2 Moren Corporation (B)6–3 Carson Manor
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 131joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 131 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
132 Purchasing and Supply Management
Key Questions for the Supply Decision Maker
Should we
• Rethink our approach to strategic requirements?
• Initiate a simplifi cation and standardization program?
• Change our specifi cation method?
How can we
• Defi ne our internal needs better to suppliers?
• Improve our acquisition of services?
• Leverage our environmental successes in the supply chain?
Need identifi cation and specifi cation are major value infl uencers. Therefore, two key deci-
sions are addressed in this chapter: (1) How do we determine organizational needs? and
(2) How do we translate and communicate these needs to (potential) suppliers?
Organizational needs that must be met by outside suppliers arise in every part of the
organization and with every employee. Furthermore, if the organization serves a customer
base with goods and/or services, these customer needs could well be the main drivers of
the acquisition system of the organization. Therefore, for an automobile manufacturer, by
far the largest portion of its spend with suppliers (for Toyota close to 80 percent of its total
costs) is spent on materials and parts that will comprise the vehicle sold to customers. A
good place to start addressing the need questions is to identify the major infl uencers of
those needs. Need identifi cation depends on the nature, size, and location of the organiza-
tion as described in the fi rst chapter. In this chapter the category of need will be addressed
as well as description of needs.
NEED CRITERIA IN THE VALUE PROPOSITION
The management of supply is keenly concerned about the value proposition for specifi c
needs acquired from suppliers. The criteria for deciding what, in a particular instance,
represents good value fall into three levels: (1) strategic, (2) traditional, and (3) additional
current.
The Moren Corporation (A) case at the end of this chapter is a good example of the ap-
plication of the three levels of criteria to the service acquisition on a major capital project.
What criteria should apply to the design of a project, and what are the implications of pur-
chasing the design from an outside fi rm?
1. Strategic CriteriaThe overarching question about any organizational requirement is the strategic impact. Is
this a strategic requirement or not?
One potential and frequently used attribute is the fi nancial implication or impact of the
requirement. Major spend areas can be identifi ed by a breakdown of any organization’s
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 132joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 132 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
Chapter 6 Need Identifi cation and Specifi cation 133
acquisition needs according to an ABC or Pareto analysis in which “A” items or about
10 percent of the number of separate needs account for 70 percent to 80 percent of the dol-
lar value of the total corporate spend. Focusing signifi cant management attention on these
“A” items or high spend needs makes a lot of sense. Strategic sourcing is often used for this
category to align supply strategy with corporate strategy.
Other criteria for making a requirement strategic include risk reduction, access to new
technology or new markets, assurance of supply in tight markets, revenue enhancement, po-
tential competitive benefi ts, and corporate image or reputation improvement. These other
criteria may be less obvious and require the supply manager to think strategically at a cor-
porate level rather than on an operational and process-focused level. Creativity and a focus
on the future are also required to identify which needs are strategic and which ones are not.
Corporate requirements do not always reach the supply manager with labels attached: strate-
gic or nonstrategic. Thus, a major contribution opportunity for the supply manager is to bring
to light strategic implications of certain requirements, given specifi c market conditions and
corporate strategic aspirations.
The identifi cation of a requirement as strategic demands a very high degree of subse-
quent supply attention.
2. Traditional CriteriaTraditional criteria for supply management comprise the traditional value proposition of
(1) quality, (2) quantity, (3) delivery, (4) price and (5) service. These fi ve criteria have
been labeled traditional because they have been identifi ed in supply literature for more than
100 years. They make common sense, are largely quantifi able, and make up a large per-
centage of most existing supplier evaluation systems.
1. Quality: Quality covers both functionality: “Does it do the job we want done?” and
conformance to specification: “Does it fit the specification agreed to?” Failure to meet
quality criteria makes the product or service unacceptable, with potentially serious
consequences for the supply organization and its customers. Therefore, meeting quality
standards is a first and minimum demand on suppliers.
2. Quantity: The quantity supplied has to be sufficient to meet demand.
3. Delivery: The timing of the delivery has to meet the purchasing company’s needs. This
can be fast or slow, but must be as promised.
4. Price: On the assumption that the previous three criteria of quality, quantity, and de-
livery are up-front requirements that must be met, or order qualifiers, then price can
be used as the “order getter.” The distinguishing difference may be the price and terms
offered by different suppliers. The four criteria of quality, quantity, delivery, and price
are covered in significant detail in the following four chapters. Therefore, their treat-
ment in this chapter is short.
5. Service: Although in practice many purchasers refer to a supplier as providing good ser-
vice when the supplier delivers regularly on time, that is not the only definition of service.
Service may include design, recordkeeping, transportation, storage, disposal, installation,
training, inspection, repair, and advice, as well as a willingness to make satisfactory
adjustments for misunderstandings or clerical errors. Some supply managers include the
supplier’s willingness to change orders on short notice and be particularly responsive to
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 133joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 133 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
134 Purchasing and Supply Management
unusual requests as part of their evaluation of the service provided. To cover some types
of service, suppliers issue guarantees, covering periods of varying length. Some service
factors may only come to light after a trade relationship has been established.
If the service is vital to the success of the purchase, such as installation for equipment,
or training of operators, then it needs to be specifi ed as part of the requirement. Service
components like a helpful and pleasant attitude, though real, may be more diffi cult to quan-
tify, yet distinguish one supplier from another.
Many suppliers specifi cally include the cost of service in the selling price. Others absorb
it themselves, charging no more than competitors and relying on the superior service for the
sale. One of the diffi cult tasks of a purchaser is to get only as much of this service factor as is
really needed without paying for the excessive service the supplier may be obliged to render
to some other purchaser. In many instances the service department of a manufacturing con-
cern is maintained as a separate organization and profi t center. The availability of service is
an important consideration for the buyer in securing the “best buy” at the outset.
The Moren Corporation (B) case at the end of this chapter requires special consideration
of the traditional fi ve criteria as they apply on a major construction project.
3. Additional Current CriteriaSupply management has become more complicated over the past decades. Additional cri-
teria have been added beyond strategic and traditional, thereby increasing the diffi culty of
assuring a sound value proposition.
These additional current criteria include: fi nancial, risk, environmental impact, innova-
tion, regulatory compliance, and social and political factors.
1. Financial Financial criteria beyond price include improvement of the corporate fi nancial statements,
both balance sheet and income statement, to raise the company’s attractiveness in the eyes
of the investment community. They include revenue enhancement, working capital and
accounts receivable reduction, cash fl ow improvement, inventory reduction, and any other
initiative that improves return on assets or investment, raises the share price, or lifts the
company’s fi nancial ratings.
2. RiskEvery business decision involves risk, and supply is no exception. Supply chain risk can
be classifi ed into three main categories: (1) operational risk: in supply terms, the risk of
interruption of the fl ow of goods or services, (2) fi nancial risk: in supply terms, the risk
that the price or total cost of the goods or services acquired will change signifi cantly, and
(3) reputational risk: in supply terms, risk that the reputation of the enterprise is adversely
affected by the method of acquisition or the behavior of the supplier. All three risks affect
the survival, competitiveness, and bottom line of the organization and may occur simulta-
neously. Chapter 2 provides more detail on managing supply risks.
3. Environmental Climate change and water, earth, and air pollution have raised environmental concerns that
must be addressed in all areas of the supply chain. While disposal of hazardous goods has
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 134joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 134 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
Chapter 6 Need Identifi cation and Specifi cation 135
been a responsibility of supply managers for several decades, environmental issues have
grown considerably. Reexamining the total supply chain from an environment perspective
raises questions way beyond hazardous goods disposal. The amount of energy and water
and scarce resources used, the transportation and handling systems and distances traveled,
the discharge of undesirable gases into the air or substances into the earth—all infl uence the
design, movement, creation, and disposal phases in the supply chain to minimize the “foot-
print.” Thus, the “best buy” has to include environmental impact as a standard consideration.
4. Innovation Innovation as a criterion for determining best value refers to the pursuit of continuing im-
provement. Current suppliers are expected to provide suggestions for value improvement
and total cost of ownership reduction on an ongoing basis. Such suggestions may require
the supply organization to make changes in design, communication, handling, advance no-
tice, scheduling, or any other supply chain practice that can be improved. Innovation sug-
gestions may also involve supplier changes and any other suggestions that may improve
the purchaser’s revenues or costs. The reason for including innovation as an additional
value criterion is that the supplier is forced to ask, How can we do better? and What can
make my customer more successful?
5. Regulatory Compliance and Transparency All agreements reached between buyers and sellers have to comply with the relevant laws
and regulations.
Failure to comply can damage the reputation of the parties and result in fi nes or cita-
tions. The legal framework for trade is covered in Chapter 15, “Legal and Ethics.” An
extensive and growing legal and regulatory structure affects trade in most developed coun-
tries, and compliance is not a minor matter. Moreover, fi nancial scandals and new account-
ing standards have increased demands for greater transparency on all fi nancial dealings of a
company. Therefore, long-term contracts, lease obligations, and hedge positions have to be
reported properly. Failure to do so may mislead investors and incur the wrath and penalties
of a range of industry watchdogs and regulators.
6. Social and Political Factors Corporate social responsibility (CSR) has become prominent in the last decade. Companies are
supposed to behave like good corporate citizens and recognize that they have social responsibil-
ities in the countries in which they operate. Therefore, dealing with socially responsible suppli-
ers is a plus for the supply organization’s image and reputation as well as its ability to develop
resilient and sustainable supply chains. Promoting opportunities for disadvantaged, minority,
and small business suppliers to quote and receive corporate orders is seen as a socially desir-
able action. MRO and small value purchases are typical categories of needs wherein socially
disadvantaged and small suppliers can make a reasonable value proposition. Activists often link
environmental and social sensitivity together as one area where organizations must demonstrate
a willingness to search for better solutions. Building an environmentally advanced facility in a
high unemployment area of the country would be seen as a concrete example.
Political concerns do not refer to paying politicians under the table. They include a
willingness to support the government in its priorities, rather than opposing them. If it is
possible to support “Buy Local” government initiatives, then a company is expected to do
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 135joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 135 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
136 Purchasing and Supply Management
so, even if it is not a hard regulatory requirement. Assisting government training initiatives
and working on government-sponsored industry panels would be additional examples.
The collective set of strategic, traditional, and additional current criteria for need iden-
tifi cation and subsequent supply chain decisions makes for a complex analysis in which
judgment also plays an important part. Not every acquisition will require an exhaustive an-
alytical review, but the supply professional through experience and judgment learns which
criteria are likely to be relevant for any particular acquisition.
The Carson Manor case at the end of this chapter deals with the challenge of evaluating
service supplier bids in response to a request for proposals based on a fairly broad defi ni-
tion of needs. How do you know that one consultant fi ts your needs better than another?
CATEGORIES OF NEEDS
Organizational needs can be classifi ed broadly into seven categories. These are (1) resale,
(2) raw or semiprocessed materials, (3) parts, components, and packaging, (4) mainte-
nance, repair, and operating supplies (MRO), (5) capital assets, (6) services, and (7) other.
Each of these categories covers a wide range of requirements (see Table 6–1).
TABLE 6–1Categories of Needs
Categories of Needs
1. Resale Resellers comprise retailers, wholesalers, distributors, agents, brokers, and traders. What they can resell covers the full range of the remaining fi ve categories below.
2. Raw and Semipro-cessed Materials
Most users of materials are converters, such as factories, and this category includes commodities, agricultural, and industrial.
3. Parts, Components, and Packaging
Assemblers use parts and components produced by their suppliers to create a fi nished product. Parts and components may be standard or special depending on the decision of the designer of the fi nished product.
4. Maintenance, Repair, and Operat-ing Supplies (MRO) and Small Value Purchases (SVP)
Every organization has MRO requirements and SVPs. The avail-ability of MRO suppliers is critical to maintain continued unin-terrupted operation of the offi ce, factory, facility, etc. Because many MRO requirements are relatively small in dollar value, SVPs are also included in this category. For SVPs, assuring availability at minimum acquisition cost is a challenge.
5. Capital Assets Any requirement that accountants classify as capital, and, therefore, an investment, becomes a capital item. Equipment, IT, real estate, and construction are included in this category. Capital items can be depreciated, are often bought under a separate budgetary allocation, and may require special fi nancing arrangements.
6. Services Services are intangible and nonmanufactured. Every organiza-tion acquires a variety of services.
7. Other Anything not covered by the above categories falls into this last one. Major requirements could be energy and water. This cat-egory would also include unusual and infrequent requirements, probably better dealt with on an ad hoc or project basis.
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 136joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 136 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
Chapter 6 Need Identifi cation and Specifi cation 137
In large organizations it is usual to assign supply professionals all or part of a cat-
egory of requirements. In small organizations one person may have to cover the full
range. The supply execution required for each category may be different, as discussed
below.
1. ResaleSince resellers represent a distribution channel between buyers and sellers, the abilities
to buy well and sell profi tably are critical to success. Resellers who do not take posses-
sion of goods or supply additional services may charge a small margin. The potential
for a reseller’s customer to bypass the reseller and deal directly with the reseller’s
supplier is an ever-present threat, as is the possibility that the reseller’s supplier will
bypass the reseller and deal directly with the reseller’s customers. For example, Honda
recently decided to discontinue selling its nonautomotive products such as ATVs and
motorbikes through separate dealers and to consolidate all Honda brand products with
automotive dealerships. Insurance companies often sell their products and services
through brokers as well as their own sales force. Airlines sell direct to customers as
well as through online and brick and mortar travel agencies.
For resellers who take ownership of the goods they resell, the largest single cost is
the price they pay for the goods. Therefore, fi nancial management of receivables and
payables and cash fl ow is a major skill required most along with logistics management.
Walmart is reputed to be able to sell a very large portion of its store merchandise be-
fore it has to pay its suppliers. In effect, its suppliers are fi nancing Walmart’s opera-
tions and inventories.
Manufacturers may choose to resell some products to complete a full line and may offer
maintenance, lubricants, or parts to improve the attractiveness of their products in use.
In the fashion industry, the ability of the retail buyer to spot trends and assess the likeli-
hood that a given style or color of garment will sell well is a critical attribute.
2. Raw and Semiprocessed MaterialsRaw materials are basic substances in their natural, modifi ed, or semiprocessed state that are
used as inputs to a production process. For example, a steelmaker needs iron ore or scrap steel,
coke, and a range of additives to create fi nished steel with particular properties. Commodities
in the agricultural world are subject to availability and price fl uctuations. Industrial commodi-
ties also experience supply and demand effects on price. Commodities that are traded on ex-
changes show daily price variations, and buyers need to decide whether to buy forward or hand
to mouth as well as decide on hedging strategies.
The purchases of large commodity buyers, such as Nestle for coffee and cocoa and
Coca Cola for sugar, will affect market prices. Commodity supply managers need to be
fully aware of market conditions. Supply and demand, price movements, and proper timing
of acquisition commitments are critical. Semiprocessed materials—steel sheets instead of
ingots, frozen pork bellies instead of hogs, cocoa butter instead of beans—tend to move in
price as the basic raw material moves with a producer’s margin added.
Frequently labeled converters, suppliers of semiprocessed materials often are much
smaller companies than the providers of their raw materials. Converters may fi nd them-
selves squeezed between their suppliers and customers, each of which is trying to off-load
the risk of unfavorable price movement.
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 137joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 137 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
138 Purchasing and Supply Management
3. Parts, Components, and PackagingIt is unusual for an assembler to make all of its products’ parts and components itself. Therefore,
it is common to depend on suppliers to provide the necessary parts, components, and packag-
ing. Design engineers and design experts determine what parts and components to buy and
which to make in-house. They also decide whether to design standard parts and components
into the product or to specify custom design. The advantage of standard parts and components is
their ready availability. The disadvantage is the ease of copying. Motorola for many years had a
very high percentage of custom-designed electrical and electronic components in their product
line. While affording duplication protection, this practice also delayed new product introduction
and increased component costs. Therefore, a major initiative was undertaken to get engineers
to design out of suppliers’ catalogs. Failure to capture market share led Google to acquire the
company to take advantage of Motorola’s patents and expertise. The company was renamed
Motorola Mobility–A Google Company, but was sold to Lenovo in 2014, thereby providing
Lenovo a global supply chain and access to the smartphone market.
Since product design is a major infl uencer of product cost and speed to market, early
supplier involvement (ESI) is a fruitful concern for this category.
Packaging is another specialized requirement, with major disposal, environmental, and
transportation implications. Since packaging is discarded by the purchaser, it has potential
environmental impact. Yet the package has to protect its contents as it fi nds its way from
product manufacturer to fi nal user. Damage during transport is a cost few parties are willing
to assume. For some consumer items, such as cosmetics, the package can be a signifi cant
sales infl uencer. For a number of items, the packaging may be worth more than its contents:
for example, beverage containers, including beer. For consumer items, marketers, packaging
designers, and packaging engineers are concerned with the aesthetic, sales appeal, labeling,
regulatory, and safety aspects. Specialty packaging suppliers may for a fee or as a free service
offer advice on various packaging options. For nonconsumer goods, the primary packaging
concerns are likely to be cost, environmental impact, and adequate contents protection given
the types of handling and transportation modes the packaged goods will experience.
4. Maintenance, Repair, and Operating SuppliesEvery organization has MRO requirements. Even the one-person offi ce needs paper, IT,
janitorial supplies, and so forth. For some companies MRO requirements are huge. Syn-
crude, the world’s largest oil sands operator, has over 150,000 stock keeping units (SKUs)
in its MRO category. For many organizations, because of the diversity of the MRO cat-
egory and the large number of relatively small requirements (C items), the challenge is
keeping acquisition costs down relative to the value of what is purchased. It doesn’t make
sense to spend $500 acquiring one $3 item. Therefore, MRO acquisition deals with many
small value purchases (SVPs) and SVPs are linked with the MRO category. Typical sup-
ply solutions include systems contracting wherein one supplier is chosen to provide a large
variety of products—for example, all offi ce, plumbing, or electrical supplies on a daily
or twice weekly delivery schedule. Designated employees will order their department’s
needs electronically from a catalog, and the supplier provides accounting with a biweekly
detailed invoice providing specifi c account totals by department. Letting users order their
own needs directly saves time and acquisition cost. Acquisition expertise is required to
identify the needs, to select a supplier, to develop a contract, and to monitor performance.
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 138joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 138 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
Chapter 6 Need Identifi cation and Specifi cation 139
5. Capital AssetsCapital assets are long-term assets that are not bought or sold in the regular course of busi-
ness, have an ongoing effect on the organization’s operations, have an expected use of
more than one year, involve large sums of money, and generally are depreciated. Assets
may be tangible or intangible. Historically, tangible assets (land, buildings, and equipment)
have been the primary focus of managerial attention because they were the key drivers of
wealth. Today, intangible assets (patents, copyrights, ideas, and knowledge) are important
generators of wealth. Intangible assets are especially challenging because traditional ac-
counting procedures do not include valuation methods for intangibles.
Capital expenditures are the result of investment and strategic decisions as opposed
to expenses and are shown on the balance sheet as assets. Accountants create separate
capital budgets, calculate depreciation, and advise on tax implications of capital purchases.
Financing capital purchases requires special attention. Capital equipment can be acquired
new or used and may be purchased outright or leased.
According to the U.S. Census Bureau, U.S. businesses typically invest between $1 and
$1.5 trillion annually in new and used capital goods. In a weak economy, businesses tend
to cut back on capital investments and in a strong economy capital expenditures fl ow again.
The impact of such behavior on the sustainability of the supplier is one area of concern
for supply managers when they evaluate suppliers. Too little investment or inconsistent
investment in capital assets may signify serious organizational problems that will affect the
supplier’s ability to deliver quality goods or services in the long term.
The Challenge of Procuring Capital Assets The acquisition of capital goods may repre-
sent a key strategic move for an organization that could affect its competitive advantage for
years to come. Or it could be a routine matter of no great consequence. In capital intensive
industries such as mining or airlines, the acquisition of capital goods represents one of the
single largest purchase categories and one of the greatest opportunities for supply to af-
fect top-line (revenue) and bottom-line growth. A major nuclear power plant may take a
decade to plan and build and may cost billions. Capital purchases are routine for a rapidly
growing fast-food chain that may start up and equip hundreds of store locations per year.
Companies with large fl eets of cars may turn over one-third of the fl eet each year and have
a fl eet manager assigned to decide which vehicles to acquire, how to dispose of vehicles,
and select insurance and maintenance providers.
The risks associated with the acquisition of capital assets can be high. From the bud-
geting process to the design of equipment or buildings, determination of location for real
estate purchases, and decisions about enterprisewide hardware and software, many factors
play into the ultimate success or failure of a capital project. Clearly defi ned supply objec-
tives that are linked to, and aligned with, organizational strategy and supported by robust
supply processes are as important to successful capital acquisition and management as they
are to noncapital purchases. Because of the high dollar amount and the long-term conse-
quences of many capital projects, the application of tools and techniques such as enter-
prisewide spend analysis; standardization of equipment, including hardware and software;
globalization of processes; and cost visibility are important.
The strategy for a specifi c capital acquisition depends on a number of factors, includ-
ing the frequency of the purchase, the projected total cost of ownership, the amount and
timing of cash fl ows, and the potential impact of the purchase on business operations.
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 139joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 139 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM
140 Purchasing and Supply Management
For example, if assets are replaced at regular intervals, it makes sense to form a close
working relationship with the supplier and focus on continuous improvement. At the
U.S. Postal Service, for example, the mission of the organization is universal service at a
reasonable cost in a timely manner. To achieve this mission consistently, large volumes
of letters and packages must be sorted accurately and quickly. Therefore, sorting equip-
ment is a strategic capital acquisition for the Postal Service. Because of design require-
ments and the desire for standardized equipment across the national organization, only
a few suppliers are available. The category management team works closely with these
suppliers to develop the specifi cation, manage the cost structure, and deliver equipment
in a shortened cycle time that delivers consistent quality, operating speed, and lowest
total cost of ownership.
For one-time or infrequent high-value purchases, total cost of ownership analysis of the
purchase and of the total supply chain costs is appropriate. There are many costs beyond
purchase price that affect the true “cost to the organization” of any particular buy and es-
pecially for capital assets. A generally accepted fi gure is that the purchase price makes up
from 30 percent to 50 percent of the total cost of ownership (TCO) of a capital purchase.
Other factors, such as maintenance and repair costs, operating costs, downtime, and yield
play key roles. Supply personnel must acquire the skills and knowledge necessary to de-
velop total cost of ownership models that estimate and capture costs throughout the sup-
ply chain. Nonroutine capital asset acquisition may require a cross-functional project team
representing users, marketers, designers, fi nancial experts, and supply experts. If appropri-
ate expertise is lacking internally, outside consultants may be brought in.
New Technology—New Equipment Competitive advantage stems from product or ser-
vice differentiation or low-cost production. New technology frequently permits an orga-
nization to gain competitive advantage on both grounds––different products and services
at signifi cantly lower cost. New technology is, therefore, of signifi cant strategic interest to
most organizations. And new technology almost always implies new equipment and new
processes. It is this strategic dimension of new equipment acquisition that has traditionally
been overlooked by supply. Intellectual property rights, speed of acquisition, installation
and debugging, continuing supplier support for operational performance and upgrades,
and development of the next generation of technological advances become prime matters
of corporate concern.
For example, in the semiconductor industry, capital equipment purchases normally rep-
resent the largest single percentage category of all purchase dollars. At Intel, the goal is
to tie capital equipment purchasing and equipment service to performance-based contract-
ing. Thus, the supplier gets paid for uptime and quality output. The more the running time
exceeds agreed-to output goals, the greater the rewards for the supplier. Future plans are
driven by the need for continuous improvement in cost per wafer and number of wafers
per year per machine. Only a few key supplier partners are included in Intel’s longer-range
technology road maps planning process––looking fi ve years out. Total cost of ownership,
not just the cost of the equipment itself, drives future technology decisions. The corporate
team approach is required to manage this process and exceptionally capable individuals
need to represent supply on the corporate team.
Equipment purchases involve, in part, engineering and production considerations and, in
part, factors largely outside the scope of these functions. From the former standpoint, there
joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 140joh24099_ch06_131-160.indd 140 27/08/14 12:56 PM27/08/14 12:56 PM